Get Driving Guide for Toyota 4 Runner SUV Sixth Generation (2025-2026)

191

Driving

4

4-1. Before driving

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

.................................. 259

Driving the vehicle....... 193

Cargo and luggage ..... 200

Vehicle load limits ....... 204

Trailer towing............... 205

Dinghy towing ............. 217

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch218

Automatic transmission222

Turn signal lever.......... 226

Parking brake.............. 227

Brake Hold .................. 231

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

.................................. 270

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)

.................................. 275

PDA (Proactive driving

assist)........................ 281

RSA (Road Sign Assist)

.................................. 288

Dynamic radar cruise con-

trol ............................. 290

4

Cruise control.............. 301

Emergency Driving Stop

System ...................... 305

4-3. Operating the lights and

wipers

TDA (Trailer Driving Assist)

.................................. 308

Headlight switch.......... 234

Fog light switch ........... 237

Stop & Start system .... 309

AHB (Automatic High

Beam)........................ 238

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

.................................. 316

Windshield wipers and

washer....................... 241

Intuitive parking assist. 323

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic

Alert) function ............ 330

Rear window wiper and

washer....................... 243

RCD (Rear Camera Detec-

tion) ........................... 335

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

.................................. 246

PKSB (Parking Support

Brake)........................ 339

4-5. Using the driving support

systems

Parking Support Brake func-

tion (static objects front

and rear of the vehicle)

.................................. 344

Toyota Safety Sense 3.0

software update......... 248

Toyota Safety Sense 3.0

.................................. 250

192

Driving

4

Parking Support Brake func-

tion (moving vehicles rear

of the vehicle)............ 347

Winter driving tips........ 448

Parking Support Brake func-

tion (pedestrians rear of

the vehicle)................ 348

Toyota parking assist moni-

tor.............................. 350

Panoramic view monitor

.................................. 363

Multi-terrain Monitor.... 399

Driving mode select switch

.................................. 412

Four-wheel drive system

(part-time 4WD models)

.................................. 414

Four-wheel drive system

(full-time 4WD models)

.................................. 417

AUTO LSD system...... 419

Rear differential lock system

.................................. 421

Crawl Control .............. 422

Multi-terrain Select...... 425

Downhill assist control sys-

tem............................ 428

Driving assist systems 431

SDM (Stabilizer with Discon-

nection Mechanism).. 436

Trailer brake controller 437

Trailer Backup Guide .. 440

4-6. Driving tips

Off-road precautions ... 445

193

4-1. Before driving

4-1.Before driving

■ Parking the vehicle

Driving t he vehicle

1 With the shift lever in D,

depress the brake pedal to

stop the vehicle completely.

The following procedures

should be observed to

ensure safe driving:

2 Set the parking brake

(P.227), and shift the shift

lever to P. (P.222)

Driving procedure

Make sure the parking brake indi-

cator light is on.

■ Starting the engine

P.218

Do not press the shift release but-

ton after shifting the shift position to

P.

■ Driving

3 Turn the engine switch to

OFF to stop the engine.

1 With the brake pedal

depressed, shift the shift

lever to D.

4 Lock the door, making sure

that you have the electronic

key on your person.

4

2 Release the parking brake.

(P.227)

If parking on a hill, block the wheels

as needed.

If the parking brake is in automatic

mode, the parking brake will be

released automatically. (P.228)

3 Gradually release the brake

pedal and gently depress the

accelerator pedal to acceler-

ate the vehicle.

■ Starting off on a steep

uphill

1 With the brake pedal

depressed, shift the shift

lever to D.

■ Stopping

The hill-start assist control will be

activated.

1 With the shift lever in D,

depress the brake pedal.

2 Pull the parking brake switch

and parking brake is set man-

ually. (P.227)

Vehicles with a Stop & Start system:

If the Stop & Start system is

enabled, depressing the brake

pedal will stop the engine.

(P.309)

2 If necessary, set the parking

brake. (P.227)

3 Release the brake pedal and

gently depress the accelera-

tor pedal to accelerate the

vehicle.

4 Press the parking brake

switch and parking brake is

released manually. (P.227)

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an

extended period of time, shift the

shift lever to P. (P.222)

Parking brake automatic release

function. (P.228)

194

4-1. Before driving

is recommended:

■When starting off on an uphill

●For the first 200 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

The hill-start assist control will acti-

vate. (P.431)

●For the first 500 miles (800 km):

■Driving in the rain

Do not tow a trailer.

●Drive carefully when it is raining,

because visibility will be reduced,

the windows may become fogged-

up, and the road will be slippery.

●For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high

speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in low

gears.

●Drive carefully when it starts to

rain, because the road surface will

be especially slippery.

• Do not drive at a constant speed

for extended periods.

●Refrain from high speeds when

driving on an expressway in the

rain, because there may be a

layer of water between the tires

and the road surface, preventing

the steering and brakes from

operating properly.

■Operating your vehicle in a for-

eign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle

registration laws and confirm the

availability of the correct fuel.

(P.617)

■Engine speed while driving

■Idling time before engine stop

In the following conditions, the

engine speed may become high

while driving.

To prevent damage to the turbo-

charger, allow the engine to idle

immediately after high-speed driving

or hill climbing.

This is due to automatic up-shifting

control or down-shifting implementa-

tion to meet driving conditions. It

does not indicate sudden accelera-

tion.

Driving condition

Idling time

●The vehicle is judged to be driving

Not nec-

essary

Normal city driving

uphill or downhill

●When the accelerator pedal is

released

High-speed driving

(Constant speed of

approx. 50 mph [80

km/h])

Not nec-

essary

●When the brake pedal is

depressed while “TOW HAUL”

mode is selected

■Restraining the engine output

Steep hill driving or

continuous driving at 62 Approxi-

mph (100 km/h) or mately 1

more (race track driv- minute

ing, etc.)

(Brake Override System)

●When the accelerator and brake

pedals are depressed at the same

time, the engine output may be

restrained.

●A warning message is displayed

on the multi-information display

while the system is operating.

WARNING

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

■Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle,

observing the following precautions

195

4-1. Before driving

●During normal driving, do not

WARNING

turn off the engine. Turning the

engine off while driving will not

cause loss of steering or brak-

ing control, however, power

assist to the steering will be lost.

This will make it more difficult to

steer smoothly, so you should

pull over and stop the vehicle as

soon as it is safe to do so.

In the event of an emergency,

such as if it becomes impossible

to stop the vehicle in the normal

way: P.568

■When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the

brake pedal while stopped with

the engine running. This prevents

the vehicle from creeping.

■When driving the vehicle

●Do not drive if you are unfamil-

iar with the location of the brake

and accelerator pedals to avoid

depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the

accelerator pedal instead of the

brake pedal will result in sudden

acceleration that may lead to an

accident.

●Use engine braking (downshift)

to maintain a safe speed when

driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously

may cause the brakes to over-

heat and lose effectiveness.

(P.222)

4

• When backing up, you may twist

your body around, leading to dif-

ficulty in operating the pedals.

Make sure to operate the pedals

properly.

●Do not adjust the positions of

the steering wheel, the seat, or

the inside or outside rear view

mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of

vehicle control.

• Make sure to keep a correct

driving posture even when mov-

ing the vehicle only slightly. This

allows you to depress the brake

and accelerator pedals properly.

●Always check that all passen-

gers’ arms, heads or other parts

of their body are not outside the

vehicle.

• Depress the brake pedal using

your right foot. Depressing the

brake pedal using your left foot

may delay response in an emer-

gency, resulting in an accident.

●Do not drive in excess of the

speed limit. Even if the legal

speed limit permits it, do not

drive over 85 mph (140 km/h)

unless your vehicle has high-

speed capability tires. Driving

over 85 mph (140 km/h) may

result in tire failure, loss of con-

trol and possible injury. Be sure

to consult a tire dealer to deter-

mine whether the tires on your

vehicle are high-speed capabil-

ity tires or not before driving at

such speeds.

●Do not drive the vehicle over or

stop the vehicle near flammable

materials.

The exhaust system and

exhaust gases can be

extremely hot. These hot parts

may cause a fire if there is any

flammable material nearby.

196

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

●Moving the shift lever to N while

the vehicle is moving will disen-

gage the engine from the trans-

mission.

■When driving on slippery

road surfaces

Engine braking is not available

when N is selected.

●Sudden braking, acceleration

and steering may cause tire

slippage and reduce your ability

to control the vehicle.

●Be careful not to shift the shift

lever with the accelerator pedal

depressed. Shifting the shift

lever to any positions other than

P or N may lead to unexpected

rapid acceleration of the vehicle

that may cause an accident and

result in death or serious injury.

●Sudden acceleration, engine

braking due to shifting, or

changes in engine speed could

cause the vehicle to skid.

●After driving through a puddle,

lightly depress the brake pedal

to make sure that the brakes

are functioning properly. Wet

brake pads may prevent the

brakes from functioning prop-

erly. If the brakes on only one

side are wet and not functioning

properly, steering control may

be affected.

■If you hear a squealing or

scraping noise (brake pad

wear indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and

replaced by your Toyota dealer, or

any reliable repairer as soon as

possible.

Rotor damage may result if the

pads are not replaced when

needed.

■When shifting the shift lever

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle

when the wear limits of the brake

pads and/or those of the brake

discs are exceeded.

●Do not let the vehicle roll back-

ward while a forward driving

position is selected, or roll for-

ward while the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may result in an acci-

dent or damage to the vehicle.

■When the vehicle is stopped

●Do not race the engine.

●Do not shift the shift lever to P

while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the trans-

mission and may result in a loss

of vehicle control.

If the vehicle is in any gear other

than P or N, the vehicle may

accelerate suddenly and unex-

pectedly, causing an accident.

●In order to prevent accidents

due to the vehicle rolling away,

always keep depressing the

brake pedal while the engine is

running, and apply the parking

brake as necessary.

●Do not shift the shift lever to R

while the vehicle is moving for-

ward.

Doing so can damage the trans-

mission and may result in a loss

of vehicle control.

●If the vehicle is stopped on an

incline, in order to prevent acci-

dents caused by the vehicle roll-

ing forward or backward, always

depress the brake pedal and

securely apply the parking

brake as needed.

●Do not shift the shift lever to a

driving position while the vehicle

is moving backward.

Doing so can damage the trans-

mission and may result in a loss

of vehicle control.

197

4-1. Before driving

●Do not leave a door or window

open if the curved glass is

coated with a metallized film

such as a silver-colored one.

Reflected sunlight may cause

the glass to act as a lens, caus-

ing a fire.

WARNING

●Avoid revving or racing the

engine.

Running the engine at high

speed while the vehicle is

stopped may cause the exhaust

system to overheat, which could

result in a fire if combustible

material is nearby.

●Always apply the parking brake,

shift the shift lever to P, stop the

engine and lock the vehicle. Do

not leave the vehicle unat-

tended while the engine is run-

ning.

If the vehicle is parked with the

shift lever in P but the parking

brake is not set, the vehicle may

start to move, possibly leading

to an accident.

■When the vehicle is parked

●Do not leave glasses, cigarette

lighters, spray cans, or soft

drink cans in the vehicle when it

is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the fol-

lowing:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette

lighter or spray can, and may

lead to a fire.

●Do not touch the exhaust pipes

while the engine is running or

immediately after turning the

engine off.

4

• The temperature inside the

vehicle may cause the plastic

lenses and plastic material of

glasses to deform or crack.

Doing so may cause burns.

●4WD models: If the shift lever is

moved before the “4HI” (part-

time 4WD models) or “4LO”

indicator turns on/off, the trans-

fer mode may not be shifted

completely.

The transfer mode disengages

both the front and rear drivesh-

afts from the powertrain and

allows the vehicle to move

regardless of the shift position.

(At this time, the indicator blinks

and the buzzer sounds.)

Therefore, the vehicle is free to

roll even if the automatic trans-

mission is in P. You or someone

else could be seriously injured.

You must complete the shifting

of the transfer mode. (P.414,

417)

• Soft drink cans may fracture,

causing the contents to spray

over the interior of the vehicle,

and may also cause a short cir-

cuit in the vehicle’s electrical

components.

●Do not leave cigarette lighters in

the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter

is in a place such as the glove

box or on the floor, it may be lit

accidentally when luggage is

loaded or the seat is adjusted,

causing a fire.

●Do not attach adhesive discs to

the windshield or windows. Do

not place containers such as air

fresheners on the instrument

panel or dashboard. Adhesive

discs or containers may act as

lenses, causing a fire in the

vehicle.

198

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

●The brake system consists of 2

or more individual hydraulic sys-

tems; if one of the systems fails,

the other will still operate. In this

case, the brake pedal should be

depressed more firmly than

usual and the braking distance

will increase. Have your brakes

fixed immediately.

■When taking a nap in the vehi-

cle

Always turn the engine off. Other-

wise, if you accidentally move the

shift lever or depress the acceler-

ator pedal, this could cause an

accident or fire due to engine

overheating. Additionally, if the

vehicle is parked in a poorly venti-

lated area, exhaust gases may

collect and enter the vehicle, lead-

ing to death or a serious health

hazard.

■If the vehicle becomes stuck

Do not spin the wheels exces-

sively when a driven wheel is up

in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in

sand, mud, etc. This may damage

the driveline components or pro-

pel the vehicle forward or back-

ward, causing an accident.

■When braking

●When the brakes are wet, drive

more cautiously.

Braking distance increases

when the brakes are wet, and

this may cause one side of the

vehicle to brake differently than

the other side. Also, the parking

brake may not securely hold the

vehicle.

NOTICE

■When driving the vehicle

●Do not depress the accelerator

and brake pedals at the same

time during driving, as this may

restrain the engine output.

●If the brake booster device does

not operate, do not follow other

vehicles closely and avoid hills

or sharp turns that require brak-

ing.

In this case, braking is still pos-

sible, but the brake pedal

should be depressed more

firmly than usual. Also, the brak-

ing distance will increase. Have

your brakes fixed immediately.

●Do not use the accelerator

pedal or depress the accelera-

tor and brake pedals at the

same time to hold the vehicle on

a hill.

■When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake and

shift the shift lever to P. Failure to

do so may cause the vehicle to

move or the vehicle may acceler-

ate suddenly if the accelerator

pedal is accidentally depressed.

●Do not pump the brake pedal if

the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal

uses up the reserve for the

power-assisted brakes.

■Avoiding damage to vehicle

parts

●Do not turn the steering wheel

fully in either direction and hold

it there for an extended period

of time.

Doing so may damage the

power steering.

199

4-1. Before driving

●Changes in quantity and quality

of oil and fluid used for the

NOTICE

●When driving over bumps in the

road, drive as slowly as possible

to avoid damaging the wheels,

underside of the vehicle, etc.

engine, transmission, transfer

(4WD vehicles), differential, etc.

●Lubricant condition for the pro-

peller shaft, bearings and sus-

pension joints (where possible),

and the function of all joints,

bearings, etc.

●Make sure to idle the engine

immediately after high-load driv-

ing. Stop the engine only after

the turbocharger has cooled

down. Failure to do so may

cause damage to the turbo-

charger

Sudden start restraint

control (Drive-Start Con-

trol [DSC])

■If you get a flat tire while driv-

ing

A flat or damaged tire may cause

the following situations. Hold the

steering wheel firmly and gradu-

ally depress the brake pedal to

slow down the vehicle.

When the following unusual

operation is performed with the

accelerator pedal depressed,

the engine output may be

restrained.

4

●It may be difficult to control your

vehicle.

• When the shift lever is shifted

●The vehicle will make abnormal

sounds or vibrations.

to R^*.

• When the shift lever is shifted

from P or R to forward drive

●The vehicle will lean abnor-

mally.

shift position such as D^*.

Information on what to do in case

of a flat tire (P.593)

When the system operates, a mes-

sage appears on the multi-informa-

tion display. Read the message and

follow the instruction.

■When encountering flooded

roads

Do not drive on a road that has

flooded after heavy rain, etc.

Doing so may cause the following

serious damage to the vehicle:

*

: Depending on the situation, the

shift position may not be

changed.

●Engine stalling

■Drive-Start Control (DSC)

●Short in electrical components

When the TRAC is turned off

●Engine damage caused by

water immersion

(P.432), sudden start restraint

control also does not operate. If

your vehicle have trouble escaping

from the mud or fresh snow due to

sudden start restraint operation,

deactivate TRAC (P.432) so that

the vehicle may become able to

escape from the mud or fresh snow.

In the event that you drive on a

flooded road and the vehicle

becomes flooded or stuck in mud

or sand, be sure to have your Toy-

ota dealer check the following:

●Brake function

Also, sudden start restraint control

200

4-1. Before driving

will not operate in the following con-

ditions:

Cargo and luggage

●When the AUTO LSD mode is

selected (if equipped)

Take notice of the following

information about storage

precautions, cargo capacity

and load:

●Vehicles with part-time 4WD:

When the front-wheel drive control

switch is in “4H” or “4L” position.

●Vehicles with full-time 4WD: When

the front-wheel drive control

switch is in “H4L” or “L4L” posi-

tion.

Capacity and distribution

●When the center differential is

locked (if equipped)

Cargo capacity depends on the

total weight of the occupants.

●When Multi-terrain Select is

selected (if equipped)

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load

capacity) — (Total weight of

occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct

Load Limit —

(1) Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your

vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined

weight of the driver and passen-

gers that will be riding in your

vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined

weight of the driver and passen-

gers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals

the available amount of cargo

and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX”

amount equals 1400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb passen-

gers in your vehicle, the amount

of available cargo and luggage

load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 −

201

4-1. Before driving

750 (5  150) = 650 lbs.)

be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B^*2lb. (kg) - A^*1lb. (kg) = C^*3lb.

(kg)

(5) Determine the combined

weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle.

That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

*1

:A =Weight of people

*2

:B =Total load capacity

*3

:C =Available cargo and luggage

load

In this condition, if 3 more passen-

gers with the combined weight of D

lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo

and luggage load will be reduced E

lb. (kg) as follows:

(6) If your vehicle will be towing

a trailer, load from your trailer

will be transferred to your vehi-

cle. Consult this manual to

determine how this reduces the

available cargo and luggage

load capacity of your vehicle.

(P.204)

C lb. (kg) - D^*4lb. (kg) = E^*5lb.

(kg)

4

*4

:D =Additional weight of people

*5

:E =Available cargo and luggage

load

Calculation formula for

your vehicle

As shown in the example above,

if the number of occupants

increases, the cargo and lug-

gage load will be reduced by an

amount that equals the

increased weight due to the

additional occupants. In other

words, if an increase in the num-

ber of occupants causes an

excess of the total load capacity

(combined weight of occupants

plus cargo and luggage load),

you must reduce the cargo and

luggage on your vehicle.

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity (vehicle

capacity weight) (P.616)

When 2 people with the com-

bined weight of A lb. (kg) are rid-

ing in your vehicle, which has a

total load capacity (vehicle

WARNING

■Things that must not be car-

ried in the luggage compart-

ment

capacity weight) of B lb. (kg),

the available amount of cargo

and luggage load capacity will

The following things may cause a

fire if loaded in the luggage com-

partment:

202

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in

the rear deck. It is not designed

for passengers. They should

ride in their seats with their seat

belts properly fastened. Other-

wise, they are much more likely

to suffer death or serious bodily

injury, in the event of sudden

braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

●Receptacles containing gaso-

line

●Aerosol cans

■Storage precautions

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may prevent the

pedals from being depressed

properly, may block the driver’s

vision, or may result in items hit-

ting the driver or passengers, pos-

sibly causing an accident.

■Capacity and distribution

●Do not exceed the maximum

axle weight rating or the total

vehicle weight rating.

●Even if the total load of occu-

pant’s weight and the cargo

load is less than the total load

capacity, do not apply the load

unevenly. Improper loading may

cause deterioration of steering

or braking control which may

cause death or serious injury.

●Stow cargo and luggage in the

luggage compartment when-

ever possible.

●Do not stack cargo and luggage

in the luggage compartment

higher than the seatbacks.

●Do not place cargo or luggage

in or on the following locations.

Roof luggage carrier

• At the feet of the driver

■ Roof luggage carrier com-

• On the front passenger or rear

seats (when stacking items)

ponents

• On the instrument panel

• On the dashboard

• On the auxiliary box or tray that

has no lid

●Secure all items in the occupant

compartment.

●When you fold down the rear

seats, long items should not be

placed directly behind the front

seats.

Roof rails

Cross rails

203

4-1. Before driving

●2WD models: Do not exceed

WARNING

125 lb. (57 kg) cargo weight on

the roof luggage carrier. Place

the cargo so that its weight is

distributed evenly between both

cross rails.

■When loading cargo on the

roof luggage carrier

To use the roof rails as a roof lug-

gage carrier, you must fit the roof

rails with two or more genuine

Toyota cross rails or their equiva-

lent. When you load cargo on the

roof luggage carrier, observe the

following:

●4WD models: Do not exceed

135 lb. (62 kg) cargo weight on

the roof luggage carrier. Place

the cargo so that its weight is

distributed evenly between both

cross rails.

●Place the cargo so that its

weight is distributed evenly

between the front and rear

axles.

NOTICE

●If loading long or wide cargo,

never exceed the vehicle overall

length or width. (P.616)

■When loading cargo (vehi-

cles with moon roof)

Be careful not to scratch the sur-

face of the moon roof.

4

●Before driving, make sure the

cargo is securely fastened on

the roof luggage carrier.

●Loading cargo on the roof lug-

gage carrier will make the cen-

ter of gravity of the vehicle

higher. Avoid high speeds, sud-

den starts, sharp turns, sudden

braking or abrupt maneuvers,

otherwise it may result in loss of

control or vehicle rollover due to

failure to operate this vehicle

correctly and result in death or

serious injury.

●If driving for a long distance, on

rough roads, or at high speeds,

stop the vehicle now and then

during the trip to make sure the

cargo remains in its place.

204

4-1. Before driving

Vehicle load limits

■Total load capacity and seating

capacity

These details are also described on

the tire and loading information

label. (P.622)

Vehicle load limits include

total load capacity, seating

capacity, TWR (Trailer

Weight Rating) and cargo

capacity.

WARNING

■Overloading the vehicle

 Total load capacity (vehicle

capacity weight): P.616

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to

the tires, but also degrade steer-

ing and braking ability, resulting in

an accident.

Total load capacity means the

combined weight of occu-

pants, cargo and luggage.

 Seating capacity: P.616

Seating capacity means the

maximum number of occu-

pants whose estimated aver-

age weight is 150 lb. (68 kg)

per person.

Even if the number of occu-

pants are within the seating

capacity, do not exceed the

total load capacity.

 TWR (Trailer Weight Rat-

ing): P.209

TWR means the maximum

gross trailer weight (trailer

weight plus its cargo weight)

that your vehicle is able to tow.

 Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase

or decrease depending on the

weight and the number of

occupants.

205

4-1. Before driving

Contact your Toyota dealer for

further information about addi-

tional requirements such as a

towing kit, etc.

Trailer tow ing

Your vehicle is designed pri-

marily as a passenger-and-

load-carrying vehicle. Tow-

ing a trailer can have an

adverse impact on handling,

performance, braking, dura-

bility, and fuel consumption.

For your safety and the

■Trailer brake controller

P.437

■Before towing

Check that the following conditions

are met:

●Ensure that your vehicle’s tires

are properly inflated. (P.622)

●Trailer tires are inflated according

to the trailer manufacturer’s rec-

ommendation.

safety of others, you must

not overload your vehicle or

trailer. You must also

ensure that you are using

appropriate towing equip-

ment, that the towing equip-

ment has been installed

correctly and used prop-

erly, and that you employ

the requisite driving habits.

●All trailer lights work as required

by law.

4

●All lights work each time you con-

nect them.

●The trailer ball is set at the proper

height for the coupler on the

trailer.

●The trailer is level when it is

hitched. Do not drive if the trailer

is not level, and check for

improper tongue weight, overload-

ing, worn suspension, or other

possible causes.

Vehicle-trailer stability and

braking performance are

affected by trailer stability,

brake performance and set-

ting, trailer brakes, the hitch

and hitch systems.

●The trailer cargo is securely

loaded.

●The rear view mirrors conform to

all applicable federal, state/provin-

cial or local regulations. If they do

not, install rear view mirrors

To tow a trailer safely, use

extreme care and drive the

vehicle in accordance with

your trailer’s characteris-

tics and operating condi-

tions.

appropriate for towing purposes.

Toyota warranties do not

apply to damage or mal-

function caused by towing a

trailer for commercial pur-

poses.

206

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

●Do not make jerky, abrupt or

sharp turns.

■Trailer towing precautions

●Do not apply the brakes sud-

denly as you may skid, resulting

in jackknifing and loss of vehicle

control. This is especially true

on wet or slippery surfaces.

To tow a trailer safely, use

extreme care and drive the vehi-

cle in accordance with the trailer’s

characteristics and operating con-

ditions. Failure to do so could

cause an accident resulting in

death or serious injury. Vehicle

stability and braking performance

are affected by trailer stability,

brake setting and performance,

and the hitch. Your vehicle will

handle differently when towing a

trailer.

●Do not exceed the trailer hitch

assembly weight, gross vehicle

weight, gross axle weight and

trailer tongue weight capacities.

●Certain Toyota Safety Sense 3.0

functions will be affected or be

unavailable: P.250, 308

■To avoid accident or injury

●Slow down and downshift

before descending steep or long

downhill grades. Do not make

sudden downshifts while

descending steep or long down-

hill grades.

●Do not exceed the TWR,

unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR

or GAWR.

●If the gross trailer weight is over

2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway con-

trol device with sufficient capac-

ity is required.

●Vehicle-trailer instability is more

likely on steep long downhills.

Before descending steep or

long downhill grades, slow

down and downshift. Do not

make sudden downshifts when

descending steep or long down-

hill grades. Avoid holding the

brake pedal down too long or

applying the brakes too fre-

quently. This could cause the

brakes to overheat and result in

reduced braking efficiency.

●If the gross trailer weight is over

5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight dis-

tributing hitch with sufficient

capacity is required.

●Adjust the tongue weight within

the appropriate range. Place

heavier loads as close to the

trailer axle as possible.

●Do not exceed 65 mph (104

km/h), the posted towing speed

limit or the speed limit for your

trailer as set forth in your trailer

owner’s manual, whichever is

lowest. Slow down sufficiently

before making a turn, in cross

winds, on wet or slippery sur-

face, etc., to help avoid an acci-

dent. If you experience a

vehicle-trailer instability from

reducing a certain speed, slow

down and make sure you keep

your vehicle speed under the

speed of which you experience

the instability.

●Do not tow a trailer when the

temporary spare tire is installed

on your vehicle.

■When towing a trailer

Toyota recommends trailers with

brakes that conform to any appli-

cable federal and state/provincial

regulations.

207

4-1. Before driving

■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle

WARNING

Weight Rating)

●If the gross trailer weight

exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer

brakes are required. Toyota rec-

ommends trailers with brakes

that conform to all applicable

federal and state/provincial reg-

ulations.

The maximum allowable gross

vehicle weight. The gross vehi-

cle weight is the total weight of

the vehicle. When towing a

trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle

weight (including the occu-

pants, cargo and any optional

equipment installed on the vehi-

cle) and the tongue weight.

●Never tap into your vehicle’s

hydraulic system, as this will

lower the vehicle’s braking

effectiveness.

●Never tow a trailer without using

a safety chain securely attached

to both the trailer and the vehi-

cle. If damage occurs to the

coupling unit or hitch ball, there

is danger of the trailer wander-

ing into another lane.

4

Towing related terms

■ GCWR (Gross Combination

■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

Weight Rating)

Rating)

The maximum allowable gross

combination weight. The gross

combination weight is the sum

of the total vehicle weight

(including the occupants, cargo

and any optional equipment

installed on the vehicle) and the

weight of the trailer being towed

(including the cargo in the

trailer).

The maximum allowable gross

axle weight. The gross axle

weight is the load placed on

each axle (front and rear).

Front GAWR

208

4-1. Before driving

Rear GAWR

■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross

trailer weight. The gross trailer

weight is the sum of the trailer

weight and the weight of the

cargo in the trailer.

TWR is calculated assuming

base vehicle with one driver,

one front passenger, towing

package (if available), hitch and

hitch systems (if required).

Without brakes

■ Tongue Weight

The load placed on the trailer

hitch ball. (P.210)

Additional optional equipment, pas-

sengers and cargo in the vehicle

will reduce the trailer weight rating

so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR

and GAWR.

If the gross trailer weight exceeds

3000 lb. (1360 kg), it is recom-

mended to use a trailer with 2 or

more axles.

Weight limits

 The gross trailer weight must

never exceed the TWR

described in the table.

(P.209)

 The gross combination weight

must never exceed the

GCWR described in the table.

(P.209)

With brakes

■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked

Trailer Weight Rating)

 The gross vehicle weight

must never exceed the

The trailer weight rating for tow-

ing a trailer without a trailer ser-

vice brake system.

GVWR indicated on the Certi-

fication Label. (P.616)

 The gross axle weight on

each axle must never exceed

the GAWR indicated on the

209

4-1. Before driving

Certification Label. (P.616)

control device with sufficient

capacity is required.

 If the gross trailer weight is

over the unbraked TWR,

trailer service brakes are

required.

 If the gross trailer weight is

over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a

weight distributing hitch with

sufficient capacity is required.

 If the gross trailer weight is

over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway

GCWR, TWR and Unbraked TWR

Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight,

gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all

within the limits.

■ GCWR^*and TWR^*

4

Drive

Grade

SR5

GCWR

TWR

10970 lb.

(4975 kg)

11025 lb.

(5000 kg)

2WD

TRD Sport

Limited

11245 lb.

(5100 kg)

11235 lb.

(5095 kg)

6000 lb.

(2720 kg)

SR5

11265 lb.

(5110 kg)

TRD Off-Road

TRD Sport

Limited

4WD

11285 lb.

(5115 kg)

11485 lb.

(5210 kg)

■ Unbraked TWR^*

1655 lb. (750 kg)

*

: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE Interna-

tional per SAE J2807.

210

4-1. Before driving

height as before connection.

Trailer Tongue Weight

Do not reduce front fender height

below original measurement.

 A recommended tongue

weight or kingpin weight var-

ies in accordance with the

types of trailers or towing as

described below.

The gross trailer weight, gross axle

weight and tongue weight can be

measured with platform scales

found at a highway weighing sta-

tion, building supply company,

trucking company, junk yard, etc.

 To ensure the recommended

values shown below, the

trailer must be loaded by

referring to the following

instructions.

Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have

different weight capacities. Toy-

ota recommends the use of Toy-

ota hitch/bracket for your

vehicle. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

• Conventional Towing

The gross trailer weight should

be distributed so that the tongue

weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue

Weight/Gross trailer weight x

100 = 9% to 11%)

 If you wish to install a trailer

hitch, contact your Toyota

dealer.

 Use only a hitch that con-

forms to the gross trailer

weight requirement of your

vehicle.

 Follow the directions supplied

by the hitch manufacturer.

 Lubricate the hitch ball and

kingpin with a light coating of

grease.

Gross trailer weight

Tongue Weight

If using a weight distributing hitch

when towing, return the front axle to

the same weight as before the

trailer connection.

 Remove the hitch ball when-

ever you are not towing a

trailer. Remove the trailer

hitch if you do not need it.

After removing the hitch, seal

any mounting holes in the

vehicle body to prevent entry

of any substances into the

vehicle.

If front axle weight cannot be mea-

sured directly, measure the front

fender height above the front axle

before connection. Adjust weight

distributing hitch torque until front

fender is returned to the same

211

4-1. Before driving

Protrudes beyond the bottom of the

lock washer and nut at least 2

threads.

WARNING

■Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have dif-

ferent weight capacities estab-

lished by the hitch manufacturer.

Even though the vehicle may be

physically capable of towing a

higher weight, the operator must

determine the maximum weight

rating of the particular hitch

assembly and never exceed the

maximum weight rating specified

for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the

maximum weight rating set by the

trailer-hitch manufacturer can

cause an accident resulting in

death or serious personal injuries.

Shank diameter

Matches the ball mount hole diame-

ter size.

Ball diameter

Matches the size of the trailer cou-

pler. Most couplers are stamped

with the required trailer ball size.

Typical trailer

Trailer class

ball size

IV

2 5/16 in.

2 in.

II and III

I

4

NOTICE

1 7/8 in.

■When installing a trailer hitch

Use only the position recom-

mended by your Toyota dealer.

Do not install the trailer hitch on

the bumper; this may cause body

damage.

Positions for towing hitch

receiver and hitch ball

Selecting trailer ball

Use the correct trailer ball for

your application.

Weight carrying ball position:

52.4 in. (1331.2 mm)

Hitch receiver pin hole posi-

tion: 45.0 in. (1143.2 mm)

■Matching trailer ball height to

Trailer ball load rating

trailer coupler height

Matches or exceeds the gross

trailer weight rating of the trailer.

No matter which class of tow hitch

applies, for a more safer trailer

hookup, the trailer ball setup must

be the proper height for the coupler

Shank length

212

4-1. Before driving

on the trailer.

■Service connector for towing

brake controllers (vehicles

without trailer brake controller)

Your vehicle is equipped with a ser-

vice connector for the trailer brake

controller as shown.

Coupler

Trailer ball

Connecting trailer lights

■Auto current cut-off function

In case of over current, the auto cut-

off function stops the power flowing

to the trailer lights to prevent dam-

age to the vehicle’s electrical sys-

tem.

Use the wire harness located in

the rear end of the vehicle.

The tow lighting system is

designed for 64 watts/5 amps of

electrical current per side (right

and left) for the trailer brake/turn

light functions.

This function is activated when the

rated current of any of the following

trailer light circuit components is

exceeded:

●Stop/turn signal light (right): maxi-

mum 5 A

Please contact your Toyota

dealer with any questions or

concerns.

●Stop/turn signal light (left): maxi-

mum 5 A

■When the auto current cut func-

tion is activated

If a trailer light does not come on

due to the activation of the auto cur-

rent cut function, the light system

will need to be reset.

Follow the reset procedure shown

below.

●If a tail light does not come on,

turn off the headlight switch.

●If the right-side stop/turn signal

light does not come on, put the

213

4-1. Before driving

turn signal in the off position or

3 Press

or

to select “Vehi-

remove foot from the brake pedal.

cle Settings” and then press and

●If the left-side stop/turn signal light

does not come on, put the turn

signal in the off position or remove

foot from the brake pedal.

hold

.

4 Press

or

to select “Trailer

If the emergency flashers do not

operate, press the emergency

flasher switch to turn them off.

Light Check” and then press

.

After the light system is reset, oper-

ate the light switches again to see if

the lights operate normally.

5 Press

check.

to start the trailer light

If the lights do not operate normally,

have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

The light check operates in the cycle

of Brake lights  Left turn lights 

Right turn lights.

■Trailer lights operation check

function

■The trailer light check is opera-

tional when

Use the meter control switches to

The trailer light check operates

when all of the following conditions

are met:

4

start the function. (P.92, 101)

 Vehicles with 7-inch display

●The vehicle is stopped.

1 Press

control switch to select

2 Press or to select “Vehi-

cle Settings” and then press and

or

of the meter

●The shift lever is shifted to P.

.

NOTICE

■Do not directly splice trailer

lights

hold

.

Do not directly splice trailer lights.

Directly splicing trailer lights may

damage your vehicle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction.

3 Press

/

to select “Trailer

Light Check” and then press

.

Removing hitch cover

4 Press

check.

 Vehicles with 12.3-inch display

1 Press and hold to display

to start the trailer light

Pull the lower edge of the hitch

cover.

the cursor on the content display

area (center) of the multi-infor-

mation display.

2 Press

or

of the meter

control switches to select “

Settings” and then press

.

214

4-1. Before driving

requires practice. Grip the

bottom of the steering wheel

and move your hand to the

left to move the trailer to the

left. Move your hand to the

right to move the trailer to the

right. (This is generally oppo-

site to reversing without a

trailer attached.) Avoid sharp

or prolonged turning. Have

someone guide you when

reversing to reduce the risk of

an accident.

Trailer towing tips

Your vehicle will handle differ-

ently when towing a trailer. To

help avoid an accident, death or

serious injury, keep the following

in mind when towing:

 Speed limits for towing a

trailer vary by state or prov-

ince. Do not exceed the

posted towing speed limit.

 Toyota recommends that the

vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65

mph (104 km/h) on a flat,

straight, dry road. Do not

exceed this limit, the posted

towing speed limit or the

speed limit for your trailer as

set forth in your trailer owner’s

manual, whichever is lowest.

Instability of the towing vehi-

cle-trailer combination (trailer

sway) increases as speed

increases. Exceeding speed

limits may cause loss of con-

trol.

 As stopping distance is

increased when towing a

trailer, vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance should be increased.

For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of

speed, allow at least one

vehicle and trailer length.

 Avoid sudden braking as you

may skid, resulting in the

trailer jackknifing and a loss of

vehicle control. This is espe-

cially true on wet or slippery

surfaces.

 Avoid jerky starts or sudden

acceleration.

 Before starting out, check the

trailer lights, tires and the

vehicle-trailer connections.

Recheck after driving a short

distance.

 Avoid jerky steering and

sharp turns, and slow down

before making a turn.

 Practice turning, stopping and

reversing with the trailer

 Note that when making a turn,

the trailer wheels will be

attached in an area away

from traffic until you become

accustomed to the feel of the

vehicle-trailer combination.

closer than the vehicle wheels

to the inside of the turn. Com-

pensate by making a wider

than normal turning radius.

 Reversing with a trailer

attached is difficult and

 Slow down before making a

215

4-1. Before driving

or steep grade. If the engine

coolant temperature gauge

indicates overheating, imme-

diately turn off the air condi-

tioning (if in use), pull your

vehicle off the road and stop

in a safe spot. (P.612)

turn, in crosswinds, on wet or

slippery surfaces, etc.

Increasing vehicle speed can

destabilize the trailer.

 Take care when passing other

vehicles. Passing requires

considerable distance. After

passing a vehicle, do not for-

get the length of your trailer,

and be sure you have plenty

of room before changing

lanes.

 Always place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle’s and

the trailer’s wheels when

parking. Apply the parking

brake firmly, and put the

transmission in P. Avoid park-

ing on a slope, but if unavoid-

able, do so only after

 To maintain engine braking

efficiency and charging sys-

tem performance when using

engine braking, do not use

the transmission in D. If in the

S mode, the transmission shift

range position must be in 5 or

lower.

4

performing the following:

1 Apply the brakes and keep

them applied.

2 Have someone place wheel

blocks under both the vehi-

cle’s and trailer’s wheels.

 Instability happens more fre-

quently when descending

steep or long downhill grades.

Before descending, slow

down and downshift. Do not

make sudden downshifts

while descending steep or

long downhill grades.

3 When the wheel blocks are in

place, release the brakes

slowly until the blocks absorb

the load.

4 Apply the parking brake

firmly.

5 Shift into P and turn off the

engine.

 Avoid holding the brake pedal

down too long or applying the

brakes too frequently. This

could cause the brakes to

overheat and result in

 When restarting after parking

on a slope:

1 With the transmission in P,

start the engine. Be sure to

keep the brake pedal

pressed.

reduced braking efficiency.

 Due to the added load of the

trailer, your vehicle’s engine

may overheat on hot days (at

temperatures over 85°F

2 Shift into a forward gear. If

reversing, shift into R.

[30°C]) when driving up a long

216

4-1. Before driving

Steer straight ahead. Do not try to

control trailer swaying by turning

the steering wheel.

• Begin releasing the accelerator

pedal immediately but very gradu-

ally to reduce speed. Do not

increase speed. Do not apply

vehicle brakes.

3 If the parking brake is in man-

ual mode, release the park-

ing brake. (P.227)

4 Release the brake pedal, and

slowly pull or back away from

the wheel blocks. Stop and

apply the brakes.

If you make no extreme correction

with the steering or brakes, your

vehicle and trailer should stabilize.

(if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can

also help to stabilize the vehicle and

trailer.)

5 Have someone retrieve the

blocks.

■Break-in schedule

●After the trailer swaying has

stopped:

• Stop in a safe place. Get all occu-

pants out of the vehicle.

• Check the tires of the vehicle and

the trailer.

• Check the load in the trailer. Make

sure the load has not shifted.

Make sure the tongue weight is

appropriate, if possible.

If your vehicle is new or equipped

with any new power train compo-

nents (such as an engine, transmis-

sion, transfer [4WD models], rear

differential or wheel bearing), Toyota

recommends that you do not tow a

trailer until the vehicle has been

driven for over 500 miles (800 km).

After the vehicle has been driven for

over 500 miles (800 km), you can

start towing. However, for the next

500 miles (800 km), drive the vehi-

cle at a speed of less than 45 mph

(72 km/h) when towing a trailer, and

avoid full throttle acceleration.

• Check the load in the vehicle.

Make sure the vehicle is not over-

loaded after occupants get in.

If you cannot find any problems, the

speed at which trailer swaying

occurred is beyond the limit of your

particular vehicle-trailer combina-

tion. Drive at a lower speed to pre-

vent instability. Remember that

swaying of the towing vehicle-trailer

increases as speed increases.

■Maintenance

●If you tow a trailer, your vehicle

will require more frequent mainte-

nance due to the additional load.

(See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet” or “Scheduled Main-

tenance Guide” / “Owner’s Manual

Supplement”.)

●Retighten the fixing bolts of the

towing ball and bracket after

approximately 600 miles (1000

km) of trailer towing.

■If trailer sway occurs

One or more factors (crosswinds,

passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.)

can adversely affect handling of

your vehicle and trailer, causing

instability.

●If trailer swaying occurs:

• Firmly grip the steering wheel.

217

4-1. Before driving

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed

to be dinghy towed (with 4

wheels on the ground)

behind a motor home.

4

NOTICE

■To avoid serious damage to

your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with the

four wheels on the ground.

218

4-2. Driving procedures

4-2.Driving procedures

engine switch mode.

Engine (ignition)

sw itch

Performing the following

operations when carrying

the electronic key on your

person starts the engine or

changes engine switch

modes.

■Engine switch illumination

Starting the engine

According to the situation, the

engine switch illumination operates

as follows.

1 Pull the parking brake switch

to check that the parking

brake is set. (P.227)

●When driver’s door or front pas-

senger’s door is opened, the

engine switch illumination illumi-

nates.

2 Check that the shift lever is in

P.

●When the engine switch is in OFF

and depressing the brake pedal

with carrying the electronic key on

your person, the engine switch

illumination blinks.

3 Firmly depress the brake

pedal.

and a message will be dis-

played on the multi-information dis-

play.

If it is not displayed, the engine

cannot be started.

●When the engine switch is in ACC

or ON, the engine switch illumina-

tion illuminates.

●When the engine switch mode is

changed from ACC or ON to OFF,

the engine switch illumination illu-

minates for a certain amount of

time. Afterwards, the engine

4 Press the engine switch

shortly and firmly.

When operating the engine switch,

one short, firm press is enough. It is

not necessary to press and hold the

switch.

switch illumination turns off.

■If the engine does not start

●The engine immobilizer system

may not have been deactivated.

(P.70)

The engine will crank until it starts

or for up to 30 seconds, whichever

is less.

Contact your Toyota dealer.

Continue depressing the brake

pedal until the engine is completely

started.

●If a message related to start-up is

shown on the multi-information

display, read the message and fol-

low the instructions.

The engine can be started from any

●If the door is unlocked with the

mechanical key, the engine can-

not be started using the smart key

system. Refer to P.607 to start the

engine. However, if the electronic

key is carried inside the vehicle

219

4-2. Driving procedures

and the doors are locked

(P.122), the engine can be

started.

WARNING

■When starting the engine

■If the battery is discharged

Always start the engine while sit-

ting in the driver’s seat. Do not

depress the accelerator pedal

while starting the engine under

any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident

resulting in death or serious injury.

The engine cannot be started using

the smart key system. Refer to

P.608 to restart the engine.

■Electronic key battery depletion

P.114

■Conditions affecting operation

P.147

NOTICE

■Notes for the entry function

P.148

■When starting the engine

●Do not race a cold engine.

■If “Smart Key System malfunc-

tion See owner’s manual” is

displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display

●If the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, have

your vehicle checked by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

4

The system may be malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

■Symptoms indicating a mal-

function with the engine

switch

■When “Check Fuel Cap” is dis-

played on the multi-information

display

If the engine switch seems to be

operating somewhat differently

than usual, such as the switch

sticking slightly, there may be a

malfunction. Contact your Toyota

dealer immediately.

P.247

■Electronic key battery

P.558

■Operation of the engine switch

Stopping the engine

●If the switch is not pressed shortly

and firmly, the engine switch

mode may not change or the

engine may not start.

1 Stop the vehicle completely.

2 Set the parking brake

(P.227), and shift the shift

lever to P.

●If attempting to restart the engine

immediately after turning the

engine switch to OFF, the engine

may not start in some cases. After

turning the engine switch to OFF,

please wait a few seconds before

restarting the engine.

Check the parking brake indicator

is illuminated.

Do not press the shift release but-

ton after shifting the shift lever to P.

■Customization

3 Press the engine switch

If the smart key system has been

deactivated in a customized setting,

refer to P.606.

shortly and firmly.

The engine will stop, and the meter

display will be extinguished.

220

4-2. Driving procedures

4 Release the brake pedal and

check that “ACCESSORY” or

“IGNITION ON” is not shown

on the multi-information dis-

play.

WARNING

■Stopping the engine in an

emergency

●If you want to stop the engine in

an emergency while driving the

vehicle, press and hold the

engine switch for more than 2

seconds, or press it briefly 3

times or more in succession.

(P.568)

However, do not touch the

engine switch while driving

except in an emergency. Turn-

ing the engine off while driving

will not cause loss of steering or

braking control. However, power

assist for these systems may be

lost making it difficult to steer or

brake before stopping the vehi-

cle depending on the remaining

charge in the battery or usage

conditions. In this situation, you

should pull over and stop the

vehicle as soon as it is safe to

do so.

■When the engine is stopped

Even if the engine switch is turned

off, the cooling fan may continue to

operate for a short time.

■Automatic engine shut off fea-

ture

●The vehicle is equipped with a

feature that automatically shuts off

the engine when the shift lever is

in P with the engine operating for

an extended period.

●The engine will automatically shut

off after approximately 1 hour if it

has been left running while the

shift lever is in P.

●The timer for the automatic engine

shut off feature will reset if the

brake pedal is depressed or if the

shift lever is in a position other

than P.

●If the engine switch is operated

while the vehicle is running, a

warning message will be shown

on the multi-information display

and a buzzer sounds.

●After the vehicle is parked, if the

door is locked with the door lock

switch (P.122) from the inside or

the mechanical key (P.116) from

the outside, the automatic engine

shut off feature will be disabled.

The timer for the automatic engine

shut off feature will be re-enabled

if the driver’s door is opened.

●To restart the engine after per-

forming an emergency shut-

down, shift the shift lever to N

and then press the engine

switch.

Changing engine switch

modes

Modes can be changed by

pressing the engine switch with

the brake pedal released. (The

mode changes each time the

switch is pressed.)

221

4-2. Driving procedures

■When ACC customization is in

off

With the engine switch turned off,

the multimedia system can still be

used for a certain time until the bat-

tery saving function starts operating.

■Auto power off function

●If the vehicle is left in ACC or ON

(the engine is not running) for

more than 20 minutes with the

shift lever is in P or the shift

release button is not pressed, the

engine switch will automatically

turn to OFF.

●If the battery is low with the shift

lever is in P or the shift release

button is not pressed, and the

engine switch is in ACC or ON

(the engine is not running), a

buzzer sounds and a message will

be displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display. If this continues, the

engine switch is automatically turn

to OFF.

“ACCESSORY”

“IGNITION ON”

1 OFF^*1

The emergency flashers can be

used.

4

The multi-information display will

not be displayed.

2 ACC^*2

Some electrical components such

as the audio system can be used.

However, this function cannot

entirely prevent battery discharge.

Do not leave the vehicle with the

engine switch in ACC or ON for long

periods of time when the engine is

not running.

“ACCESSORY” will be displayed

on the multi-information display.

NOTICE

3 ON

■To prevent battery discharge

All electrical components can be

used.

●Do not leave the engine switch

in ACC or ON for long periods of

time without the engine running.

“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

●If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION

ON” is displayed on the multi-

information display, the engine

switch is not off. Exit the vehicle

after turning the engine switch

off.

*1

:If the shift lever is in a position

other than P or the shift release

button is pressed when turning

off the engine, the engine switch

will be remained to ON, not to

OFF.

*2

:ACC mode can be enabled/dis-

abled on the customize menu.

(P.646)

222

4-2. Driving procedures

When stopping the engine

with the shift lever in a

position other than P

Automatic transmis-

sion

Select the shift position

depending on your pur-

pose and situation.

If the engine is stopped when

the shift lever is in a position

other than P or the shift release

button is pressed, the engine

switch will not be turned to OFF.

Perform the following proce-

dure to turn the switch to OFF:

Shift position purpose

and functions

Shift posi-

1 Check that the parking brake

Objective or function

tion

is set.

Parking the vehi-

cle/starting the engine

2 Shift the shift lever to P.

P

Do not press the shift release but-

ton after shifting the shift lever to P.

R

N

Reversing

3 Check that “IGNITION ON” is

displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display and press the

engine switch shortly and

firmly.

Neutral (Condition in

which the power is not

transmitted)

*1

D

S

Normal driving

*2

S mode driving

4 Check that “ACCESSORY”

or “IGNITION ON” on the

multi-information display is

off.

(P.225)

*1

*2

:Shifting to the D position allows

the system to select a gear suit-

able for the driving conditions.

Setting the shift lever to the D

position is recommended for nor-

mal driving.

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not stop the engine with the

shift lever in a position other than

P or the shift release button

pressed. If the engine is stopped

with the shift lever in a position

other than P or the shift release

button pressed, the engine switch

will not be turned OFF but instead

remain ON. If the vehicle is left in

ON, battery discharge may occur.

:Selecting shift ranges using S

mode restricts the upper limit of

the possible gear ranges, con-

trols engine braking force, and

prevents unnecessary upshifting.

■Driving on a downhill

On declines, there may be case

where the vehicle shifts down auto-

matically to obtain engine braking.

As a result of the downshifting, the

engine speed may increase.

223

4-2. Driving procedures

■To protect the automatic trans-

mission

AI-SHIFT automatically operates

when the shift lever is in D or S.

●If the tires spin continually when

the vehicle becomes stuck in mud,

dirt or snow, or if the accelerator

pedal is depressed and released

repeatedly while driving, the auto-

matic transmission temperature

may become too high and the

automatic transmission may be

damaged.

WARNING

■When driving on slippery

road surfaces

Do not accelerate or shift gears

suddenly.

Sudden changes in engine brak-

ing may cause the vehicle to spin

or skid, resulting in an accident.

To avoid damaging the automatic

transmission, the system may

temporarily lock the gear. If the

automatic transmission tempera-

ture falls, the gear locking is can-

celed and the automatic

Shifting the shift lever

transmission is returned to the

normal operation.

●If the automatic transmission fluid

temperature is high, “Transmis-

sion Oil Temp High Stop in a Safe

Place and See Owner’s Manual”

will be displayed on the multi-

information display. Immediately

stop the vehicle in a safe place,

shift the shift lever to P and wait

until the warning message go off.

If the warning message go off, you

may start the vehicle again. If the

warning message do not go off,

contact your Toyota dealer.

4

■When driving with the dynamic

radar cruise control activated

Even when switching the driving

mode to S mode with the intent of

enabling engine braking, engine

braking will not occur because

dynamic radar cruise control will not

be canceled. (P.225)

●While driving in S mode, down-

shifting to 6, 5, 4, or 3 is possible

based on vehicle speed. (P.225)

While the engine switch is in

ON and the brake pedal

depressed^*, shift the shift lever

while pushing the shift release

button on the shift knob.

■Restraining sudden start (Drive-

Start Control)

Shift the shift lever while

P.199

pushing the shift release button

on the shift knob.

■AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically selects

the suitable gear according to driver

operation and driving conditions.

Shift the shift lever normally.

224

4-2. Driving procedures

When shifting the shift lever

between P and D, make sure that

the vehicle is completely stopped.

*

: For the vehicle to be able to be

shifted from P, the brake pedal

must be depressed before the

shift release button is pushed. If

the shift release button is pushed

first, the shift lock will not be

released.

5 Press and hold the shift lock

override button and then push

the button on the shift knob.

The shift lever can be shifted

while both buttons are pressed.

■Shift lock system

The shift lock system is a system to

prevent accidental operation of the

shift lever in starting.

The shift lever can be shifted from P

only when the engine switch is in

ON, the brake pedal is depressed

and the shift release button is

pushed.

■If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P

WARNING

■To prevent an accident when

releasing the shift lock

First, check whether the brake pedal

is being depressed.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted

even though the brake pedal is

depressed and the shift release but-

ton is pushed, there may be a prob-

lem with the shift lock system. Have

the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as

an emergency measure to ensure

that the shift lever can be shifted.

Before pressing the shift lock

override button, make sure to set

the parking brake and depress the

brake pedal.

If the accelerator pedal is acci-

dentally depressed instead of the

brake pedal when the shift lock

override button is pressed and the

shift lever is shifted out of P, the

vehicle may suddenly start, possi-

bly leading to an accident result-

ing in death or serious injury.

Releasing the shift lock:

1 Set the parking brake.

2 Turn the engine switch off.

3 Depress the brake pedal.

4 Pry the cover up with a flathead

screwdriver or equivalent tool.

To prevent damage to the cover,

cover the tip of the screwdriver

with a rag.

Selecting the driving

mode

■ Drive mode

P.412

225

4-2. Driving procedures

range when the fluid temperature

is high.

Changing shift ranges in

S mode

●When the shift range is 7 or lower,

holding the shift lever toward “+”

sets the shift range to 8.

When the shift lever is in the S

position, the shift lever can be

operated as follows:

■Downshifting restriction warn-

ing buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving

performance, downshifting opera-

tion may sometimes be restricted. In

some circumstances, downshifting

may not be possible even when the

shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will

sound twice.)

■If the “S” indicator does not

come on even after shifting the

shift lever to “S”

This may indicate a malfunction in

the automatic transmission system.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

1 Upshifting

4

2 Downshifting

The selected shift range, from S1 to

S8 will be displayed on the multi-

information display.

“TOW HAUL” switch

Activating “TOW HAUL” mode

changes engine, transmission,

and steering to be more suitable

when pulling a trailer.

The initial shift range in S mode is

set automatically to 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7

according to vehicle speed.

However, the initial shift range may

be set to 4 if AI-SHIFT has oper-

ated while the shift lever was in the

D position. (P.223)

■S mode

●You can choose from 8 levels of

accelerating force and engine

braking force.

●A lower shift range will provide

greater accelerating force and

engine braking force than a higher

shift range, and the engine revolu-

tions will also increase.

●To prevent the engine from over

revving, upshifting may automati-

cally occur.

“TOW HAUL” indicator

“TOW HAUL” switch

●To protect the automatic transmis-

sion, a function is adopted that

automatically selects a higher shift

226

4-2. Driving procedures

Press the “TOW HAUL” switch

Turn signal lever

The “TOW HAUL” indicator will

come on.

Operating instructions

Press the switch once more to can-

cel the mode.

■Automatic deactivation of

“TOW HAUL” mode

“TOW HAUL” mode is deactivated

the following conditions:

●When the front-wheel drive control

switch is in “4L” (part-time 4WD

models) or “L4L” (full-time 4WD

models)

●When driving mode select or

Multi-terrain Select (if equipped) is

selected

1 Right turn

2 Lane change to the right

(move the lever partway and

release it)

The right hand signals will flash 3

times.

3 Lane change to the left

(move the lever partway and

release it)

The left hand signals will flash 3

times.

4 Left turn

■Turn signals can be operated

when

The engine switch is in ON.

227

4-2. Driving procedures

■If the indicator flashes faster

than usual

Parking brake

 Bulb type front turn signal

The parking brake can be

set or released automati-

cally or manually. In auto-

matic mode, the parking

Check that the front turn signal light

bulb has not burned out.

 LED type turn signal

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

brake can be set or released

automatically according to

shift lever operation.

■If the turn signals stop flashing

before a lane change has been

performed

Also, even in automatic

mode, the parking brake can

be set or released manually.

Operate the lever again.

Operating instructions

4

■ Using the manual mode

The parking brake can be set

and released manually.

U.S.A.

Canada

1 Pull the switch to set the

parking brake.

The parking brake indicator light

will turn on.

Pull and hold the parking brake

228

4-2. Driving procedures

switch if an emergency occurs and

it is necessary to operate the park-

ing brake while driving.

vehicle stopped and the brake

pedal depressed.

The auto function may not oper-

ate if the shift lever is moved

extremely quickly or the brake

pedal is not firmly depressed. In

this situation, apply the parking

brake manually.

2 Press the switch to release

the parking brake.

• Operate the parking brake switch

while depressing the brake pedal.

• Using the parking brake auto-

matic release function, the park-

ing brake can be released by

depressing the accelerator pedal.

When using this function, slowly

depress the accelerator pedal.

(P.228)

■ Turning the automatic

mode off

While the vehicle is stopped and

depressing the brake pedal,

press and hold the parking

brake switch until a buzzer

sounds and a message is

shown on the multi-information

display.

Make sure that the parking brake

indicator light turn off.

If the parking brake indicator

light flash, operate the switch

again. (P.581)

■ Turning the automatic

mode on

■Parking brake operation

●When the engine switch is not in

ON, the parking brake cannot be

released using the parking brake

switch.

While the vehicle is stopped,

pull and hold the parking brake

switch until a buzzer sounds and

a message is shown on the

multi-information display.

●When the engine switch is not in

ON, automatic mode (automatic

brake setting and releasing) is not

available.

When the automatic mode is

turned on, the parking brake

operates as follows.

■Parking brake automatic

release function

When all of the following conditions

are met, the parking brake can be

released by depressing the acceler-

ator pedal.

 When the shift lever is shifted

from P, the parking brake will

be released, and the parking

brake indicator light will turn

off.

●The driver’s door is closed

●The driver is wearing the seat belt

●The shift lever is in a forward driv-

ing position or reverse driving

position

 When the shift lever is shifted

to P, the parking brake will be

set, and the parking brake

indicator light will turn on.

●The malfunction indicator lamp or

brake system warning light is not

illuminated

When depressing the accelerator

pedal, depress it slowly.

Operate the shift lever with the

229

4-2. Driving procedures

If the parking brake is not released

when the accelerator pedal is

depressed, release the parking

brake manually.

mode, the parking brake indicator

light will turn on and stay on as

described below:

ON: Comes on until the parking

brake is released.

When the shift lever is shifted from

P, the parking brake will be released

automatically.

Not in ON: Stays on for approxi-

mately 15 seconds.

●When the engine switch is turned

to OFF with the parking brake set,

the parking brake indicator light

will stay on for about 15 seconds.

This does not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

■Parking brake automatic lock

function

The parking brake will be set auto-

matically under the following condi-

tions:

●The brake pedal is not depressed

●The driver’ door is open

■When the parking brake switch

malfunctions

Automatic mode (automatic brake

setting and releasing) will be turned

on automatically.

●The driver’ seat belt is not fas-

tened

●The shift lever is in a position

other than N

■Parking the vehicle

P.193

4

●The malfunction indicator lamp

and brake system warning light

are not illuminated

■Parking brake engaged warning

buzzer

■If “Parking Brake Temporarily

Unavailable” is displayed on

the multi-information display

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is

driven with the parking brake

engaged. “Parking Brake ON” is dis-

played on the multi-information dis-

play (with the vehicle reaching a

speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

If the parking brake is operated

repeatedly over a short period of

time, the system may restrict opera-

tion to prevent overheating. If this

happens, refrain from operating the

parking brake. Normal operation will

return after about 1 minute.

■If the brake system warning

light comes on

P.576

■Usage in winter time

P.449

■If “Parking Brake Unavailable”

is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display

Operate the parking brake switch. If

the message does not disappear

after operating the switch several

times, the system may be malfunc-

tioning. Have the vehicle inspected

by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■When parking the vehicle

Do not leave a child in the vehicle

alone. The parking brake may be

released unintentionally by a child

and there is the danger of the

vehicle moving that may lead to

an accident resulting in death or

serious injury.

■Parking brake operation sound

When the parking brake operates, a

motor sound (whirring sound) may

be heard. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

■Parking brake indicator light

●Depending on the engine switch

230

4-2. Driving procedures

WARNING

■When the parking brake can-

not be released due to a mal-

function

■Parking brake switch

Do not set any objects near the

parking brake switch. Objects

may interfere with the switch and

may lead the parking brake to

unexpectedly operate.

Driving the vehicle with the park-

ing brake set will lead to brake

components overheating, which

may affect braking performance

and increase brake wear. Have

the vehicle inspected by your Toy-

ota dealer immediately if this

occurs.

■Parking brake automatic lock

function

Never use the automatic parking

brake engagement function in

place of normal parking brake

operation. This function is

designed to reduce the risk of a

collision due to the driver forget-

ting to engage the parking brake.

Over-reliance on this function to

park the vehicle safely may lead

to an accident resulting in death

or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, shift

the shift lever to P, set the parking

brake and make sure that the

vehicle does not move.

■When the system malfunc-

tions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place

and check the warning messages.

■When the vehicle battery is

discharged

The parking brake system cannot

be activated. (P.608)

231

4-2. Driving procedures

belt.

Brake Hold

If any of the conditions above are

detected when the brake hold sys-

tem is enabled, the system will turn

off and the brake hold standby indi-

cator light will go off. In addition, if

any of the conditions are detected

while the system is holding the

brake, a warning buzzer will sound

and a message will be shown on the

multi-information display. The park-

ing brake will then be set automati-

cally.

The brake hold system

keeps the brake applied

when the shift lever is in D,

S, N or P with the system on

and the brake pedal has

been depressed to stop the

vehicle. The system

releases the brake when the

accelerator pedal is

■Brake hold function

●If the brake pedal is left released

for a period of about 3 minutes

after the system has started hold-

ing the brake, the parking brake

will be set automatically. In this

case, a warning buzzer sounds

and a message is shown on the

multi-information display.

depressed with the shift

lever in D or S to allow

smooth start off.

4

Enabling the system

●To turn the system off while the

system is holding the brake, firmly

depress the brake pedal and

press the button again.

Turns the brake hold system on

The brake hold standby indica-

tor (green)

comes on. While

●The brake hold function may not

hold the vehicle when the vehicle

is on a steep incline. In this situa-

tion, it may be necessary for the

driver to apply the brakes. A warn-

ing buzzer will sound and the

multi-information display will

inform the driver of this situation. If

a warning message is shown on

the multi-information display, read

the message and follow the

the system is holding the brake,

the brake hold operated indica-

tor (yellow)

comes on.

instructions.

●When do not wish for the parking

brake to operate automatically,

press and hold the brake hold

switch until the standby indicator

(green) turns off, and then turn the

engine switch off.

■Brake hold system operating

conditions

■When the parking brake is set

automatically while the system

is holding the brakes

The brake hold system cannot be

turned on in the following condi-

tions:

Perform any of the following opera-

tions to release the parking brake.

●The driver’s door is not closed.

●The driver is not wearing the seat

●Depress the accelerator pedal.

232

4-2. Driving procedures

(The parking brake will not be

released automatically if the seat

belt is not fastened.)

models).

●“Brake Hold Unavailable Press

Brake to Deactivate”

• When the “DAC/CRAWL” switch is

operated while the brake hold sys-

tem is activated.

• When the four-wheel drive control

switch is turned to “4L” mode

(part-time 4WD models) or “L4L”

mode (full-time 4WD models)

while the brake hold system is

activated.

●Operate the parking brake switch

with the brake pedal depressed.

Make sure that the parking brake

indicator light goes off. (P.227)

■When an inspection at your

Toyota dealer is necessary

When the brake hold standby indi-

cator (green) does not illuminate

even when the brake hold switch is

pressed with the brake hold system

operating conditions met, the sys-

tem may be malfunctioning. Have

the vehicle inspected at your Toyota

dealer.

The brake hold system and downhill

assist control system or transfer

“4L” mode (part-time 4WD models)

or “L4L” mode (full-time 4WD mod-

els) cannot be activated at the same

time.

■If “Brake Hold Malfunction

Press Brake to Deactivate Visit

Your Dealer” or “Brake Hold

Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”

is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display

Please press the brake hold switch

with the brake pedal depressed to

turn off the brake hold system.

■If the brake hold operated indi-

cator flashes

P.581

The system may be malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■Warning messages and buzzers

■When the vehicle is on a

steep incline

Warning messages and buzzers are

used to indicate a system malfunc-

tion or to inform the driver of the

need for caution. If a warning mes-

sage is shown on the multi-informa-

tion display, read the message and

follow the instructions.

Take care when using the brake

hold system on a steep incline,

exercise caution. The brake hold

function may not hold brakes in

such situations.

Also, the system may not activate

depending on the angle of the

slope.

■When another control activates

with the brake hold system

A message is displayed on the

multi-information display in any of

the following cases.

■When stopped on a slippery

road

The system cannot stop the vehi-

cle when the gripping ability of the

tires has been exceeded. Do not

use the system when stopped on

a slippery road.

●“Brake Hold Unavailable See the

Owner’s Manual”

• When the brake hold switch is

pressed while the downhill assist

control system is activated.

• When the brake hold switch is

pressed while the front-wheel

drive control switch is turned to

“4L” mode (part-time 4WD mod-

els) or “L4L” mode (full-time 4WD

233

4-2. Driving procedures

NOTICE

■When parking the vehicle

The brake hold system is not

designed for use when parking

the vehicle for a long period of

time. Turning the engine switch off

while the system is holding the

brake may release the brake,

which would cause the vehicle to

move. When operating the engine

switch, depress the brake pedal,

shift the shift lever to P and set

the parking brake.

4

234

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

4-3.Operating the lights and wipers

time running lights (P.234)

and all the lights listed above

Headlight sw itch

turn on and off automatically.

The headlights can be oper-

ated manually or automati-

cally.

4

(if equipped) Off

■AUTO mode can be used when

The engine switch is in ON.

Operating instructions

■Daytime running light system

Operating the

switch turns

●Vehicles with bulb type front turn

signal lights: The daytime running

lights illuminate using the same

lights as the low beam headlights

and illuminate dimmer than the

low beam headlights.

on the lights as follows:

Vehicles with LED type front turn

signal lights: The daytime running

lights illuminate using the same

lights as the parking lights and illu-

minate brighter than the parking

lights.

●To make your vehicle more visible

to other drivers during daytime

driving, the daytime running lights

turn on automatically when all of

the following conditions are met.

(The daytime running lights are

not designed for use at night.)

• The engine is started

U.S.A.

• The parking brake is released

• The headlight switch is in the

Canada

*

or

position

*

1

The side marker, park-

: When the surroundings are bright

ing, tail, license plate, instru-

ment panel lights, and

daytime running lights

(P.234) turn on.

●The daytime running lights remain

on after they illuminate, even if the

parking brake is set again.

●For the U.S.A.: Daytime running

lights can be turned off by operat-

ing the switch.

2

3

The headlights and all

●Compared to turning on the head-

lights, the daytime running light

system offers greater durability

and consumes less electricity, so

it can help improve fuel economy.

lights listed above (except

daytime running lights) turn

on.

The headlights, day-

235

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■Headlight control sensor

automatically.

When the light switch is in the

position and the surrounding

area is dark, this function will oper-

ate.

■Windshield wiper linked head-

light illumination

When driving during daytime with

the headlight switch turned to

The sensor may not function prop-

erly if an object is placed on the sen-

sor, or anything that blocks the

sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor

detecting the level of ambient light

and may cause the automatic head-

light system to malfunction.

, if the windshield wipers are

used, the headlights will turn on

automatically after several seconds

to help enhance the visibility of your

vehicle.

■Battery-saving function

■Automatic light off system

In order to prevent the battery of the

vehicle from discharging, if the

headlights and/or tail lights are on

when the engine switch is turned to

OFF the battery-saving function will

operate and automatically turn off all

the lights after approximately 20

minutes. When the engine switch is

turned to ON, the battery-saving

function will be disabled.

When any of the following are per-

formed, the battery-saving function

is canceled once and then reacti-

vated. All the lights will turn off auto-

matically 20 minutes after the

battery-saving function has been

reactivated:

4

●When the headlights are on: The

headlights and tail lights turn off

30 seconds after the driver’s door

is opened and closed if the engine

switch is turned to ACC or OFF.

(The lights turn off immediately if

on the key is pressed after all

the doors are closed.)

●When only the tail lights are on:

The tail lights turn off automati-

cally if the engine switch is turned

to ACC or OFF and the driver’s

door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the

engine switch to ON, or turn the light

●When the headlight switch is oper-

ated

switch

or

once and

or .

●When a door is opened or closed

■Customization

then back to

■Light reminder buzzer

Some functions can be customized.

(P.646)

A buzzer sounds when the engine

switch is turned to ACC or OFF and

the driver’s door is opened while the

lights are turned on.

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

■When unlock the doors (wel-

come lamp) (If equipped)

Do not leave the lights on longer

than necessary when the engine

is not running.

When the doors are unlocked using

the entry function or wireless remote

control, the parking lights turn on

236

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Turning on the high beam

headlights

1 Raises the level of the head-

lights

2 Lowers the level of the head-

lights

1 With the headlights on, push

the lever forward to turn on

the high beams.

■ Guide to dial settings

 Single projection lamp

Pull the lever back to the center

position to turn the high beams off.

Loading condition

Control

switch

2 Pull the lever toward you and

release it to flash the high

beams once.

Passen-

gers

Payload

position

Driver Only

None

0

1

You can flash the high beams with

the headlights on or off.

Full Occu-

pancy

Manual headlight leveling

dial

Maximum

*

Full Occu-

pancy

3

4

Load

Maximum

*

The vehicle is equipped with

manual leveling of the head-

lamps. The aim of the head-

lamps can be adjusted by

adjusting the dial settings based

on your vehicle loading condi-

tion.

Driver Only

Load

 Dual projection lamp

Loading condition

Control

switch

position

Passen-

Payload

gers

It is recommended that the

headlamps remain adjusted as

close to “0” position so not to

interfere with other road users.

Driver Only

None

0

1

Full Occu-

pancy

237

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Loading condition

Fog light sw itch

Control

switch

position

Passen-

Payload

gers

The fog lights secure excel-

lent visibility in difficult driv-

ing conditions, such as in

rain and fog.

Maximum

*

Full Occu-

pancy

2

3

Load

Maximum

*

Driver Only

Load

Operating instructions

*

: Maximum load means weight

capacity of rear axle or overall

vehicle has been reached

4

1

2

^*1or

^*2Turns the

front fog lights off

Turns the front fog lights

on

*1

*2

:U.S.A.

:Canada

■Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.

238

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

AHB (Automatic High

Beam)

2 Turn the headlight switch to

the or position.

When the headlight switch lever is

in the low beam position, the AHB

system will be enabled and the

AHB indicator will illuminate.

The Automatic High Beam

uses a front camera located

on the upper portion of the

windshield to detect the

brightness of the lights of

vehicles ahead, street-

lights, etc., and automati-

cally changes the head

lights between the high

beams and low beams.

WARNING

■For safe use

■Automatic operating condi-

tions of the high beams

Do not overly rely on the Auto-

matic High Beam. Always drive

safely, taking care to observe your

surroundings and turning the high

beams on or off manually if nec-

essary.

●When all of the following condi-

tions are met, the high beams will

illuminate automatically:

• The vehicle speed is approxi-

mately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.

• The area ahead of the vehicle is

dark.

• There are no vehicles ahead with

lights on.

• There are few streetlights or other

lights on the road ahead.

■To prevent unintentional

operation of the Automatic

High Beam System

●When it is necessary to disable

the system: P.250

●If any of the following conditions

are met, the headlights will

change to the low beams:

• Vehicle speed drops below

approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is

not dark.

Using the Automatic High

Beam System

1 Press the Automatic High

Beam switch.

• There is a vehicle ahead with

lights on.

• There are many streetlights or

other lights on the road ahead.

■Front camera detection

●In the following situations, the high

beams may not be automatically

changed to the low beams:

• When a vehicle cuts in front of

your vehicle

• When another vehicle crosses in

239

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

front of the vehicle

detect the brightness of the sur-

roundings. This may cause the

low beams to remain on or the

high beams to flash or dazzle

pedestrians or vehicles ahead. In

such a case, it is necessary to

manually change between the

high beams and low beams.

• When there are lights similar to

headlights or tail lights in the sur-

rounding area

• When vehicles ahead are repeat-

edly detected and then hidden

due to repeated curves, road

dividers or roadside trees

• When a vehicle ahead

approaches from a far lane

• When a vehicle ahead is far away

• When a vehicle ahead has no

lights

• When the lights of a vehicle ahead

are dim

• When a vehicle ahead is reflecting

strong light, such as own head-

lights

• When headlights or tail lights of

vehicles ahead are turned off,

dirty, changing color, or not aimed

properly

• Situations in which the sensors

may not operate properly: P.254

●The headlights may change to the

low beams if a vehicle ahead that

is using fog lights without its head-

lights turned on is detected.

• When the headlights are repeat-

edly changing between the high

beams and low beams.

• When use of the high beams is

inappropriate or when the high

beams may be flashing or daz-

zling pedestrians or other drivers.

• When the vehicle is used in an

area in which vehicles travel on

the opposite side of the road of

the country for which the vehicle

was designed, for example using

a vehicle designed for right-hand

traffic in a left-hand traffic area, or

vice versa

• When it is necessary to disable

the system: P.250

• Situations in which the sensors

may not operate properly: P.254

■Temporarily reducing front

4

●House lights, street lights, traffic

signals, and illuminated billboards

or signs may cause the high

beams to change to the low

beams, or the low beams to

remain on.

●The following may change the tim-

ing at which the headlights

change to the low beams:

• The brightness of lights of vehi-

cles ahead

• The movement and direction of

vehicles ahead

• The distance between the vehicle

and a vehicle ahead

• When a vehicle ahead only has

lights illuminated on one side

• When a vehicle ahead is a two-

wheeled vehicle

camera sensitivity

The sensitivity of the front camera

can be temporarily reduced.

1 Turn the engine switch off with

the following conditions met.

• The condition of the road (gradi-

ent, curve, condition of the road

surface, etc.)

●The headlight switch is in the

• The number of passengers and

amount of luggage

or

position.

●The headlight switch lever is in the

low beam position.

●The headlights may change

between the high beams and low

beams unexpectedly.

●The Automatic High Beam switch

is on.

2 Turn the engine switch to ON.

3 Within 60 seconds after perform-

ing step 2, push the headlight

●Bicycles and other small vehicles

may not be detected.

●In the following situations, the sys-

tem may not be able to correctly

240

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

switch lever to the high beam

position then pull it to the original

position quickly 10 times, then

leave the lever in its original posi-

tion.

4 If the sensitivity is changed, the

Automatic High Beam indicator

will blink 3 times.

Turning the high beams

on/off manually

Temporarily changing to

the low beams

■ Changing to the high

beams

It is recommended to switch to

the low beams when use of the

high beams is inappropriate or

when the high beams may

cause problems or distress to

other drivers or pedestrians

nearby.

Push the lever forward.

The AHB indicator will turn off and

the high beam indicator will turn on.

Pull the lever to its original position

to enable the Automatic High Beam

system again.

Pull the lever rearward and then

return it to its original position.

The high beams will illuminate

while the lever is pulled, how-

ever, after the lever is returned

to its original position, the low

beams will remain on for a cer-

tain amount of time. After this,

the Automatic High Beam sys-

tem will operate.

■ Changing to the low beams

Press the Automatic High Beam

switch.

The AHB indicator will turn off.

Press the switch to enable the

Automatic High Beam system

again.

241

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Intermittent operation

Windshield wipers and

*2

washer

3

4

5

^*1or

Low speed wiper operation

Operating the lever can

switch between automatic

operation and manual oper-

ation, or can use the

washer.

*2

^*1or

High speed wiper operation

*2

^*1or

Temporary operation

Wiper intervals can be adjusted

when intermittent operation is

selected.

NOTICE

■When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they

may damage the windshield.

Operating the wiper lever

4

Operate the

lever operates

the wipers or washer as follows:

When intermittent windshield

wiper operation is selected, the

wiper interval can be also

adjusted.

6 Increases the intermittent

windshield wiper frequency

7 Decreases the intermittent

windshield wiper frequency

8

Washer/wiper dual operation

*2

1

2

^*1or

Pulling the lever operates the wip-

ers and washer.

(After operating several times, the

wipers operate once more time

Off

*2

242

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

after a short delay to prevent drip-

ping. However, the dripping preven-

tion does not operate while the

vehicle is moving.)

WARNING

■Caution regarding the use of

washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the

washer fluid until the windshield

becomes warm. The fluid may

freeze on the windshield and

cause low visibility. This may lead

to an accident, resulting in death

or serious injury.

*1

:U.S.A.

*2

:Canada

■The windshield wiper and

washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in ON.

■Using the voice control system

(if equipped)

NOTICE

■When there is no washer fluid

The following operations can be

performed using the voice control

system:

spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump

may be caused if the lever is

pulled toward you and held con-

tinually.

●Operating the windshield wipers

only once

●Operating the windshield washer

(it can be performed only when

the vehicle is stopped)

■When a nozzle becomes

blocked

For details regarding the voice con-

trol system, refer to “MULTIMEDIA

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

In this case, contact your Toyota

dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or

other object. The nozzle will be

damaged.

■Effects of vehicle speed on

wiper operation

■To prevent battery discharge

With low speed windshield wiper

operation selected, wiper operation

will be switched from low speed to

intermittent wiper operation when

the vehicle is stationary. (However,

when the wiper intervals are

Do not leave the wipers on longer

than necessary when the engine

is off.

adjusted to the highest level, the

mode will not switch.)

■If no windshield washer fluid

sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are

not blocked if there is washer fluid in

the windshield washer fluid reser-

voir.

243

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Rear window wiper

and washer

The rear window wiper and

washer can be used by

operating the lever.

NOTICE

■When the rear window is dry

4

Do not use the wiper, as it may

damage the rear window.

Washer/wiper dual operation

Pushing the lever operates the

wiper and washer.

Operating the wiper lever

The wiper will automatically operate

a couple of times after the washer

squirts.

Operating the

switch

4

The washer will automatically oper-

ate and clean the rear camera.

operates the rear wiper as fol-

lows.

*1

:U.S.A.

*2

:Canada

■The rear window wiper and

washer can be operated when

●The engine switch is in ON.

●The back window is completely

closed.

■Using the voice control system

(if equipped)

The following operations can be

performed using the voice control

system:

●Operating the rear window wiper

only once

*2

1

2

3

^*1or

●Operating the rear window clean-

ing washer (it can be performed

only when the vehicle is stopped)

Off

*2

For details regarding the voice con-

trol system, refer to “MULTIMEDIA

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Intermittent operation

^*1or

*2

■If no washer fluid sprays

Normal operation

Check that the washer nozzle is not

blocked, if there is washer fluid in

244

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

the washer fluid reservoir.

(P.647)

■Dripping prevention wiper

sweep

NOTICE

When the washer is operated, the

wipers will operate once more time

after a short delay to prevent drip-

ping.

■When the washer fluid tank is

empty

Do not operate the switch continu-

ally as the washer fluid pump may

overheat.

■Back door opening linked rear

window wiper stop function

■When a nozzle becomes

blocked

When the rear window wiper is

operating, if the back door is opened

while the vehicle is stopped, opera-

tion of the rear window wiper will be

stopped to prevent anyone near the

vehicle from being sprayed by water

from the wiper. When the back door

is closed, wiper operation will

In this case, contact your Toyota

dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or

other object. The nozzle will be

damaged.

■To prevent battery discharge

*

resume.

Do not leave the wiper on longer

than necessary when the engine

is not running.

*

: The setting must be customized at

your Toyota dealer.

■Reverse-linked function

When the shift lever is shifted to R

when the front wipers are operating,

the rear window wiper will operate

once.

Changing the rear window

wiper rest position

When the rear window wiper is

not being used, it retract to rear

spoiler. To enable the rear win-

dow wiper to be lifted when

parking in cold conditions or

when replacing a rear window

wiper insert, change the rest

position of the rear window

wiper to the service position

using the wiper lever.

■Intermittent window wiper oper-

ation

●When intermittent window wiper

operation mode is selected, the

wiper will operate once and then

switch to intermittent operation.

●During intermittent operation, the

wiper stops temporarily at the

reversing position.

■When the rear window wiper

and washer switch is turned off

The rear wiper will stop operation

and return to the retracted position

after approximately 3 seconds.

However, if the engine switch is

turned to ACC or turned off while the

rear wiper is operating, the rear

wiper will stop at that position and

will not return to the retracted posi-

tion.

■ Raising the wiper to the ser-

vice position

1 The back window is com-

pletely closed.

2 Turn the

^*1or

switch to the

^*2position.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

3 Turn the engine switch off.

245

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

4 Within approximately 45 sec-

onds of turning the engine

switch off, move the wiper

lever to the

position

and hold it for approximately

2 seconds or more.

The wipers will move to the service

position.

4

*1

:U.S.A.

*2

:Canada

■Lowering the rear window wiper

to the retracted position

When the engine switch is ON and

one of the following conditions is

met, the rear wiper returns to the

retracted position.

• When the rear wiper switch is

operated

• Vehicle speed is about 4 mph (7

km/h) or more

• When the shift position is set to R

246

4-4. Refueling

4-4.Refueling

●Always hold the grips on the

fuel tank cap and turn it slowly

to remove it.

Opening the fuel tank

cap

A whooshing sound may be

heard when the fuel tank cap is

loosened. Wait until the sound

cannot be heard before fully

removing the cap. In hot

weather, pressurized fuel may

spray out of the filler neck and

cause injury.

Perform the following steps

to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehi-

cle

●Do not allow anyone that has

not discharged static electricity

from their body to come close to

an open fuel tank.

 Turn the engine switch off and

ensure that all the doors and

windows are closed.

●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that

are harmful if inhaled.

 Confirm the type of fuel.

■Fuel types

P.617

●Do not smoke while refueling

the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to

ignite and cause a fire.

■Fuel tank opening for unleaded

gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling,

your vehicle has a fuel tank opening

that only accommodates the spe-

cial nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

●Do not return to the vehicle or

touch any person or object that

is statically charged. This may

cause static electricity to build

up, resulting in a possible igni-

tion hazard.

WARNING

■When refueling

■When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions

to prevent fuel overflowing from

the fuel tank:

Observe the following precautions

while refueling the vehicle. Failure

to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

●Securely insert the fuel nozzle

into the fuel filler neck.

●After exiting the vehicle and

before opening the fuel door,

touch an unpainted metal sur-

face to discharge any static

electricity. It is important to dis-

charge static electricity before

refueling because sparks result-

ing from static electricity can

cause fuel vapors to ignite while

refueling.

●Stop filling the tank after the fuel

nozzle automatically clicks off.

●Do not top off the fuel tank.

247

4-4. Refueling

cap until you hear a click. Once

the cap is released, it will turn

slightly in the opposite direction.

NOTICE

■Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehi-

cle, such as causing the emission

control system to operate abnor-

mally or damaging fuel system

components or the vehicle’s

painted surface.

Opening the fuel tank cap

1 Press the opener switch.

■When “Check Fuel Cap” is dis-

played on the multi-information

display

The fuel tank cap may be unfas-

tened or loose. Turn the engine

switch to OFF, check the cap and

tighten it securely. If the message

remains, wait a few seconds and

then turn the engine switch to OFF

once again.

4

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly

to open it and put it into the

holder on the fuel filler door.

WARNING

■When replacing the fuel tank

cap

Do not use anything but a genu-

ine Toyota fuel tank cap designed

for your vehicle. Doing so may

cause a fire or other incident

which may result in death or seri-

ous injury.

■When Opening the fuel tank

cap

Depending on the driving condi-

tions of the vehicle before refuel-

ing, it may take some time to

reduce the pressure in the tank.

Unless there is an actual emer-

gency, do not use the emergency

release lever to open the fuel door

and then open the fuel tank cap.

Doing so may cause fuel to spray

out from the fuel filler opening.

■If the fuel filler door cannot be

opened

Contact your Toyota dealer

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank

248

4-5. Using the driving support systems

4-5.Using the driving support systems

software version of the system.

Toyota Safety Sense

*

3.0 software update

■Precautions for use

*

●Be aware that some functions

may temporarily be disabled if a

legal or safety related issue

occurs.

: If equipped

It is necessary to enter a

connected services con-

tract, provided by Toyota, to

use these functions. For

details, contact your Toyota

dealer.

●If a connected services contract

has not been entered or has

expired, software updates will not

be able to be performed wire-

lessly.

Checking your vehicle’s

Toyota Safety Sense 3.0

version

WARNING

■For safe use

When the Toyota Safety Sense

3.0 software is updated, the oper-

ating methods of functions may

change. Using this system without

knowing the correct operating

methods may lead to an accident

resulting in death or serious injury.

To access the appropriate

Owner’s Manual, it is necessary

to check the software version of

the system and then visit the

Owner’s Manual website.

●Make sure to read the Digital

Owner’s Manual which corre-

sponds to the software version

of the system, available at the

Owner’s Manual website,

■ Checking the version using

Toyota App

The software version of the sys-

tem can be checked using Toy-

ota App.

before using this system.

Content of the Toyota

Safety Sense 3.0 Owner’s

Manual

This Owner’s Manual contains

information for Ver. 2. For the

latest information about the con-

trols, use, warnings/precautions,

etc. of each function of Toyota

Safety Sense 3.0, refer to the

Digital Owner’s Manual at the

Owner’s Manual website.

Before using this system, be

sure to read the Owner’s Man-

ual which corresponds to the

249

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Selecting your vehicle’s Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 version

1 Access the following URL using a computer or smartphone:

Country Language

URL

QR code

/

resources/warranty-owners-manuals/

manual?om=om35b85u.4runner.

2025.2412.cv.vh

U.S.A.

English

French

manual?om=om35b85u.4runner.

2025.2412.cv.vh

Canada

manual?om=om35b85d.4runner.

2025.2412.cv.vh

4

2 Select the file which includes the previously checked system ver-

sion.

■What can be checked using the

Toyota APP

Updating the software

The following items can be checked

If a software update is available,

or performed.

a notification will be displayed

by Toyota APP. Follow the

●Software version, update details,

precautions, use methods, etc.

instructions displayed on the

screen.

●Software update

■Software update precautions

●After a software update has been

performed, it will not be possible

to revert to a previous version.

●Depending on the communication

environment and the content of an

update, a software update may

take several hours. Although an

update will be suspended when

the engine switch is turned off, it

will resume when the engine

switch is changed back to ON.

●Toyota Safety Sense 3.0 can still

be used while a software update is

being performed.

250

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●If attention is necessary while

Toyota Safety Sense

3.0

performing driving operations or

a system malfunction occurs, a

warning message or warning

buzzer will be operated. If a

warning message is displayed

on the display, follow the

The Toyota Safety Sense 3.0

consists of the driving

assist systems and contrib-

utes to a safe and comfort-

able driving experience:

instructions displayed.

●Depending on external noise,

the volume of the audio system,

etc. it may be difficult to hear the

warning buzzer. Also, depend-

ing on the road conditions, it

may be difficult to recognize the

operation of the system.

WARNING

■Toyota Safety Sense 3.0

The Toyota Safety Sense 3.0

operates under the assumption

that the driver will drive safely,

and is designed to help reduce

the impact to the occupants in a

collision and assist the driver

under normal driving conditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of

recognition accuracy and control

performance that this system can

provide, do not overly rely on this

system. The driver is solely

■When it is necessary to dis-

able the system

In the following situations, make

sure to disable the system.

Failure to do so may lead to the

system not operating properly,

possibly leading to an accident

resulting in death or serious injury.

●When the vehicle is tilted due to

being overloaded or having a

flat tire

responsible for paying attention to

the vehicle’s surroundings and

driving safely.

●When driving at extremely high

speeds

■For safe use

●Do not overly rely on this sys-

tem. The driver is solely respon-

sible for paying attention to the

vehicle’s surroundings and driv-

ing safely. This system may not

operate in all situations and pro-

vided assistance is limited.

●When towing another vehicle

with the TDA (Trailer Driving

Assist) (P.308) deactivated.

●When the vehicle is being trans-

ported by a truck, ship, train,

etc.

Over-reliance on this system to

drive the vehicle safely may

lead to an accident resulting in

death or serious injury.

●When the vehicle is raised on a

lift and the tires are allowed to

rotate freely

●When inspecting the vehicle

using a drum tester such as a

chassis dynamometer or speed-

ometer tester, or when using an

on vehicle wheel balancer

●Do not attempt to test the oper-

ation of the system, as it may

not operate properly, possibly

leading to an accident.

●When the vehicle is driven in a

sporty manner or off-road

251

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert)

P.275

WARNING

●When using an automatic car

wash

■ PDA (Proactive Driving

Assist)

●When a sensor is misaligned or

deformed due to a strong

impact being applied to the sen-

sor or the area around the sen-

sor

P.281

■ RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if

equipped)

●When accessories which

obstruct a sensor or light are

temporarily installed to the vehi-

cle

P.288

■ Dynamic radar cruise con-

trol

●When a compact spare tire or

tire chains are installed to the

vehicle or an emergency tire

puncture repair kit has been

used

P.290

■ Cruise control

P.301

4

●When the tires are excessively

worn or the inflation pressure of

the tires is low

■ Emergency Driving Stop

System

P.305

●When non-genuine Toyota sus-

pension and/or tires other than

the manufacturer specified size

are installed. (P.257)

Sensors used by Toyota

Safety Sense 3.0

●When the vehicle cannot be

driven stably, due to a collision,

malfunction, etc.

Various sensors are used to

obtain the necessary informa-

tion for system operation.

●When the vehicle is being

driven on a slippery surface

such as an icy road or a very

wet road.

■ Sensors which detect the

surrounding conditions

 Front

Driving assist systems

■ AHB (Automatic High

Beam)

P.238

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)

P.259

■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

P.270

Front radar sensor

252

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Front camera

 Rear

●Keep the radar sensors and

radar sensor covers clean at all

times.

Clean the front of a radar sensor

or the front or back of a radar sen-

sor cover if it is dirty or covered

with water droplets, snow, etc.

When cleaning the radar sensor

and radar sensor cover, use a soft

cloth to remove dirt so as to not

damage them.

Rear side radar sensors

WARNING

■To prevent malfunction of the

radar sensors

Observe the following precau-

tions. Failure to do so may lead to

a radar sensor not operating prop-

erly, possibly leading to an acci-

dent resulting in death or serious

injury.

Radar sensor

Radar sensor cover

●Do not attach accessories,

stickers (including transparent

stickers), aluminum tape, etc. to

a radar sensor or radar sensor

cover and their surrounding

area.

●Do not subject a radar sensor or

its surrounding area to impact.

If a radar sensor, the front grille,

or front bumper has been sub-

jected to a impact, have the vehi-

cle inspected by your Toyota

dealer.

●Do not disassemble the radar

sensors.

●Do not modify or paint the radar

sensors or radar sensor cover,

or replace them with anything

other than Toyota genuine parts.

253

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●Do not attach stickers (including

transparent stickers) or other

items to the area of the wind-

shield in front of the front cam-

era (shaded area in the

WARNING

●In the following situations, recal-

ibration of the radar sensors will

be necessary. For details, con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

illustration).

• When a radar sensor is

removed and installed, or

replaced

• When the front bumper or the

front grille has been replaced

■To prevent malfunction of the

front camera

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Approximately 1.6 in. (4 cm)

Failure to do so may lead to the

front camera not operating prop-

erly, possibly leading to an acci-

dent resulting in death or serious

injury.

4

●If the part of the windshield in

front of the front camera is

fogged up or covered with con-

densation or ice, use the wind-

shield defogger to remove the

fog, condensation, or ice.

●Always keep the windshield

clean.

• If the windshield is dirty or cov-

ered with an oily film, water

droplets, snow, etc., clean the

windshield.

●If water droplets cannot be

properly removed from the area

of the windshield in front of the

front camera by the windshield

wipers, replace the wiper insert

or wiper blade.

• Even if a glass coating agent is

applied to the windshield, it will

still be necessary to use the

windshield wipers to remove

water droplets, etc. from the

area of the windshield in front of

the front camera.

●Do not attach window tint to the

windshield.

●Replace the windshield if it is

damaged or cracked.

• If the inner side of the wind-

shield where the front camera is

installed is dirty, contact your

Toyota dealer

If the windshield has been

replaced, recalibration of the front

camera will be necessary. For

details, contact your Toyota

dealer.

●Do not allow liquids to contact

the front camera.

●Do not allow bright lights to

shine into the front camera.

254

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Front camera installation area

WARNING

on the windshield

●Do not damage the lens of the

front camera or allow it to

become dirty.

If the system determines that the

windshield may be fogged up, it

will automatically operate the

heater to defog the part of the

windshield around the front cam-

era. When cleaning, etc., be care-

ful not to touch the area around

the front camera until the wind-

shield has cooled sufficiently, as

touching it may cause burns.

When cleaning the inside of the

windshield, do not allow glass

cleaner to contact the lens of the

front camera. Do not touch the

lens of the front camera.

If the lens of the front camera is

dirty or damaged, contact your

Toyota dealer.

■Situations in which the sensors

and the systems may not oper-

ate properly

●Do not subject the front camera

to a strong impact.

●When the height or inclination of

the vehicle has been changed due

to modifications (P.257)

●Do not change the position or

orientation of the front camera

or remove it.

●When the windshield is dirty,

●Do not disassemble the front

fogged up, cracked or damaged

camera.

●When the ambient temperature is

high or low

●Do not modify any parts around

the front camera, such as the

inside rear view mirror or ceil-

ing.

●When mud, water, snow, dead

insects, foreign matter, etc., is

attached to the front of the sensor

●Do not attach accessories

which may obstruct the front

camera to the hood, front grille,

or front bumper. For details,

contact your Toyota dealer.

●When in inclement weather such

as heavy rain, fog, snow, or a

sandstorm

●When water, snow, dust, etc., is

thrown up in front of the vehicle, or

when driving through mist or

smoke

●If a surfboard or other long

object is to be mounted on the

roof, make sure that it will not

obstruct the front camera.

●When the headlights are not illu-

minated while driving in the dark,

such as at night or when in a tun-

nel

●Do not modify or change the

headlights and other lights.

●When the lens of a headlight is

dirty and illumination is weak

●When the headlights are mis-

aligned

●When a headlight is malfunction-

ing

●When the headlights of another

vehicle, sunlight, or reflected light

shines directly into the front cam-

era

255

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●When the brightness of the sur-

rounding area changes suddenly

●When driving near a TV tower,

broadcasting station, electric

power plant, radar equipped vehi-

cles, etc., or other location where

strong radio waves or electrical

noise may be present

●When a wiper blade is blocking

the front camera

●When a detectable vehicle is car-

rying a load which protrudes from

its cargo area

●When in a location or near objects

which strongly reflect radio waves,

such as the following:

• Tunnels

• Truss bridges

• Gravel roads

• Rutted, snow-covered roads

• Walls

• Large trucks

●When a detectable vehicle has lit-

tle exposed metal, such as a vehi-

cle which is partially covered with

cloth, etc.

●When a detectable vehicle is

irregularly shaped, such as a trac-

tor, sidecar, etc.

• Manhole covers

• Guardrail

• Metal plates

4

●When the distance between the

vehicle and a detectable vehicle

has become extremely short

●When near a step or protrusion

●When a detectable vehicle is at an

angle

●When a detectable vehicle is nar-

row, such as a small mobility vehi-

cle

●When snow, mud, etc. is attached

to a detectable vehicle

●When a detectable vehicle has a

small front or rear end, such as an

unloaded truck

●When driving on the following

kinds of roads:

• Roads with sharp curves or wind-

ing roads

• Roads with changes in grade,

such as sudden inclines or

declines

●When a detectable vehicle has a

low front or rear end, such as a

low bed trailer

• Roads which is sloped to the left

or right

• Roads with deep ruts

• Roads which are rough and

unmaintained

• Roads which frequently undulate

or are bumpy

●When the steering wheel is being

operated frequently or suddenly

●When a detectable vehicle has

extremely high ground clearance

●When the vehicle is not in a con-

stant position within a lane

●When parts related to this system,

the brakes, etc. are cold or

extremely hot, wet, etc.

●When the wheels are misaligned

●When driving on slick road sur-

256

4-5. Using the driving support systems

faces, such as when it is covered

with ice, snow, gravel, etc.

■Changes in brake operation

sound and pedal response

●When the course of the vehicle

differs from the shape of a curve

●When the brakes have been oper-

ated, brake operation sounds may

be heard and the brake pedal

response may change, but this

does not indicate a malfunction.

●When the vehicle speed is exces-

sively high when entering a curve

●When entering/exiting a parking

lot, garage, car elevator, etc.

●When the system is operating, the

brake pedal may feel stiffer than

expected or sink. In either situa-

tion the brake pedal can be

depressed further. Further

depress the brake pedal as nec-

essary.

●When driving in a parking lot

●When driving through an area

where there are obstructions

which may contact your vehicle,

such as tall grass, tree branches,

a curtain, etc.

■Certification

P.686

●When driving in strong wind

■Situations in which the lane

may not be detected

■When the SDM (Stabilizer with

Disconnection Mechanism) (if

equipped) is operating,

(P.436)

●When the lane is extremely wide

or narrow

Each function is limited as follows:

●Immediately after changing lanes

or passing through an intersection

Function

Status

O

●When driving in a temporary lane

or lane regulated by construction

PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-

tem)

●When there are structures, pat-

terns, shadows which are similar

to lane lines in the surrounding

(P.259)

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

(P.270)

●When there are multiple white

lines for a lane line

—

●When the lane lines are not clear

or driving on a wet road surface

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)

(P.275)

*

1

●When a lane line is on a curb

PDA (Proactive driving

assist)

(P.281)

●When driving on a bright, reflec-

tive road surface, such as con-

crete

*

2

■Situations in which some or all

of the functions of the system

cannot operate

Dynamic radar cruise con-

trol

(P.290)

O

●When a malfunction is detected in

this system or a related system,

such as the brakes, steering, etc.

Emergency Driving Stop

System

—

(P.305)

●When the VSC, TRAC, or other

safety related system is operating

Definition of symbols:

O= Available,

—= Not available

●When the VSC, TRAC, or other

safety related system is off

*1

:Alert is available only

257

4-5. Using the driving support systems

*2

:Partially unavailable

The brake assist function operates,

but the steering wheel assist func-

tion does not.

●When the SDM is operating, the

following PDA functions will be

disabled:

• PDA-SA (Steering Assist) function

• PDA-OAA (Obstacle Anticipation

Assist) functions

■When lift up

When using a lift kit up to 4 in. (101 mm), including tire height.

Toyota recommends the use of a Toyota genuine lift kit as a non-genuine lift

kits may degrade system performance.

Details are in the following table.

Suspension variation

Tire variation

Description

Toyota normal suspension

The system will operate nor-

mally if the settings comply

with Toyota specifications. To

verify the settings, visit a Toy-

ota authorized service/repair

facility.

*1

Toyota genuine 2.5 inch lift

up kit (if equipped)

4

The system may not operate

properly. Please see a Toyota

authorized service/repair facil-

ity to verify and change the set-

tings.

Toyota genuine 2.5 inch lift

up kit (if equipped)

*2

*3

*4

This system is not designed to

accommodate the configura-

tion. Toyota highly recom-

mends that modifications

within this category not be

done.

Toyota normal suspension

Toyota genuine 2.5 inch lift

up kit (if equipped)

Failure to observe this recom-

mendation may cause the sys-

tem to not operate properly

which may lead to an accident.

Modifications within this cate-

gory require an authorized Toy-

ota service/repair facility to

disable the Toyota Safety

Non-genuine lift up kit (if

equipped)

Any

Sense 3.0 functions.

However, this may also lead to

the possibility of an accident.

*1

:Manufacturer specified tire sizes

258

4-5. Using the driving support systems

*2

:Tire sizes up to 3 inches plus the tire size specified by the manufacturer

*3

*4

:Any size other than the manufacturer specified tire sizes.

*2

:Tire sizes exceeding the range specified in

.

259

4-5. Using the driving support systems

PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-

tem)

WARNING

■For safe use

●Driving safely is solely the

responsibility of the driver. Pay

careful attention to the sur-

rounding conditions in order to

ensure safe driving.

Never use the pre-collision sys-

tem in place of normal braking

operations. This system cannot

help avoid or reduce the impact

of a collision in every situation.

Over-reliance on this system to

drive the vehicle safely may

lead to an accident resulting in

death or serious injury.

The pre-collision system

uses sensors to detect

objects (P.260) in the path

of the vehicle. When the

system determines that the

possibility of a frontal colli-

sion with a detectable

object is high, a warning

operates to urge the driver

to take evasive action and

the potential brake pressure

is increased to help the

driver avoid the collision. If

the system determines that

the possibility of a collision

is extremely high, the

●Although the pre-collision sys-

tem is designed to help avoid or

help reduce the impact of a col-

lision, its effectiveness may

change according to various

conditions. Therefore, it may not

always be able to achieve the

same level of performance.

Read the following items care-

fully. Do not overly rely on this

system and always drive care-

fully.

4

brakes are automatically

applied to help avoid the

collision or help reduce the

impact of the collision.

• For safe use: P.250

The pre-collision system can

be disabled/enabled and the

warning timing can be

■When to disable the pre-colli-

sion system

When it is necessary to disable

the system: P.250

changed. (P.269)

■When towing another vehicle

P.308

■When lift up

P.257

260

Detectable objects

4-5. Using the driving support systems

“Pre-Collision System”

If the system determines that

the accelerator pedal is strongly

depressed, the following icon

and message will be displayed

on the multi-information display.

The system can detect the fol-

lowing as detectable objects.

(Detectable objects differ

depending on the function.)

 Vehicles

 Bicycles^*

 Pedestrians

 Motorcycles^*

 Walls

*

: Detected as a detectable object

only when being ridden.

“Accelerator Pedal is

Pressed”

System functions

■ Pre-collision warning

■ Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines

that the possibility of a collision

is high, a buzzer will sound and

an icon and warning message

will be displayed on the multi-

information display to urge the

driver to take evasive action.

If the system determines that

the possibility of a collision is

high and the brake operation by

the driver is insufficient, the

braking power will be increased.

■ Pre-collision brake control

If the system determines that

the possibility of a collision is

extremely high, the brakes are

automatically applied to help

avoid the collision or reduce the

impact of the collision.

If the detectable object is a vehi-

cle, there may be cases where

moderate braking will be per-

formed with the warning.

■ Emergency steering assist

If the system determines that

the following conditions are met,

assistance will be provided to

help enhance vehicle stability

and prevent lane departure.

During assistance, in addition to

the pre-collision warning, the fol-

261

4-5. Using the driving support systems

lowing icon will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

 The possibility of a collision is

high

 There is sufficient space

within the lane to perform

evasive steering maneuvers

 The driver is operating the

steering wheel

 When turning left/right and a

pedestrian or bicycle is

detected

During assistance, the pre-colli-

sion warning will operate and a

message will be displayed to

warn the driver.

4

■ Intersection collision avoid-

ance support (crossing

vehicles)

■ Intersection collision avoid-

ance support (left/right

turn)

At an intersection, etc., if the

system determines that the pos-

sibility of a collision with an

approaching vehicle or motorcy-

cle is high, the pre-collision

warning and pre-collision brak-

ing will operate.

In situations such as the follow-

ing, if the system determines

that the possibility of a collision

is high, the pre-collision warning

and pre-collision braking will

operate.

Depending on the intersection,

assistance may not operate cor-

rectly.

Depending on the intersection,

assistance may not operate cor-

rectly.

 When turning left/right at an

intersection and crossing the

path of an oncoming vehicle

262

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Suspension system (P.431)

controls the damping force of

the shock absorbers to help

maintain an appropriate vehicle

posture.

WARNING

■Pre-collision braking

●When the pre-collision braking

function is operating, a large

amount of braking force will be

applied.

■ Acceleration Suppression

at Low Speed

When driving at a low speed, if

the accelerator pedal is strongly

depressed and the system

●The pre-collision braking func-

tion is not designed to hold the

vehicle stopped. If the vehicle is

stopped by pre-collision brake

control, the driver should oper-

ate the brakes immediately as

necessary.

determines that there is a possi-

bility of a collision, engine output

will be restrained or the brakes

will be applied weakly to restrict

acceleration. During operation,

a buzzer will sound and a warn-

ing indicator and message will

be displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display.

●The pre-collision braking func-

tion may not operate if certain

operations are performed by the

driver. If the accelerator pedal is

being depressed strongly or the

steering wheel is being turned,

the system may determine that

the driver is taking evasive

action and possibly prevent the

pre-collision braking function

from operating.

●If the brake pedal is being

depressed, the system may

determine that the driver is tak-

ing evasive action and possibly

delay the operation timing of the

pre-collision brake control.

■Acceleration Suppression at

Low Speed

“Accelerator Pedal is

Pressed”

If the steering wheel is being

turned, the system may determine

that the driver is taking evasive

action and possibly prevent the

Acceleration Suppression at Low

Speed function from operating or

possibly causing its operation to

be canceled.

■ Suspension control (vehi-

cles with Adaptive Variable

Suspension system)

When the system determines

that the possibility of a collision

is high, the Adaptive Variable

263

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■Emergency steering assist

●The emergency steering assist

will be canceled when the sys-

tem determines that lane depar-

ture prevention control has

completed.

●Depending on operations per-

formed by the driver, emer-

gency steering assist may not

operate or operation may be

canceled.

• If the accelerator pedal is

depressed strongly, the steering

wheel is turned heavily, the

brake pedal is depressed, or the

turn signal lever is operated, the

system may determine that the

driver is taking evasive action

and the emergency steering

assist may not operate.

4

• While the emergency steering

assist is operating, if the accel-

erator pedal is depressed

strongly, the steering wheel is

turned heavily, or the brake

pedal is depressed, the system

may determine that the driver is

taking evasive action and emer-

gency steering assist operation

may be canceled.

• While the emergency steering

assist is operating, if the steer-

ing wheel is held or turned in the

opposite direction of system

operation, emergency steering

assist operation will be can-

celed.

■Operating conditions of each function of the pre-collision system

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the pos-

sibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high.

However, the system will not operate in the following situations:

●When the vehicle has not been driven a certain amount after a terminal of

the battery has been disconnected and reconnected

●When the shift lever is in R

264

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The following are the operational speeds and cancelation conditions of each

function:

●Pre-collision warning

Relative speed between

Detectable objects

Vehicle speed

your vehicle and object

Approximately 3 to 110 Approximately 3 to 110

mph (5 to 180 km/h) mph (5 to 180 km/h)

Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 50 to 130

Preceding vehicles,

stopped vehicles

Oncoming vehicles

Bicycles

mph (30 to 180 km/h)

mph (80 to 220 km/h)

Approximately 3 to 50

mph (5 to 80 km/h)

Approximately 3 to 50

mph (5 to 80 km/h)

Approximately 3 to 50

mph (5 to 80 km/h)

Approximately 3 to 50

mph (5 to 80 km/h)

Pedestrians

Preceding motorcycles, Approximately 3 to 110 Approximately 3 to 50

mph (5 to 80 km/h)

stopped motorcycles

mph (5 to 180 km/h)

Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 20 to 110

mph (30 to 180 km/h)

Oncoming motorcycles

mph (30 to 180 km/h)

While the pre-collision warning is operating, if the steering wheel is operated

heavily or suddenly, the pre-collision warning may be canceled.

●Pre-collision brake assist

Relative speed between

your vehicle and object

Detectable objects

Vehicle speed

Preceding vehicles, Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 7 to 110

stopped vehicles

Bicycles

mph (30 to 180 km/h)

Approximately 20 to 50 Approximately 20 to 50

mph (30 to 80 km/h) mph (30 to 80 km/h)

Approximately 20 to 50 Approximately 20 to 50

mph (30 to 80 km/h) mph (30 to 80 km/h)

mph (10 to 180 km/h)

Pedestrians

Preceding motorcycles, Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 7 to 50

stopped motorcycles mph (30 to 180 km/h) mph (10 to 80 km/h)

265

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●Pre-collision braking

Relative speed between

your vehicle and object

Detectable objects

Vehicle speed

Preceding vehicles,

stopped vehicles

Approximately 3 to 110 Approximately 3 to 110

mph (5 to 180 km/h) mph (5 to 180 km/h)

Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 50 to 130

mph (30 to 180 km/h)

Oncoming vehicles

Bicycles

mph (80 to 220 km/h)

Approximately 3 to 50

mph (5 to 80 km/h)

Approximately 3 to 50

mph (5 to 80 km/h)

Approximately 3 to 50

mph (5 to 80 km/h)

Approximately 3 to 50

mph (5 to 80 km/h)

Pedestrians

Preceding motorcycles, Approximately 3 to 110 Approximately 3 to 50

mph (5 to 180 km/h)

stopped motorcycles

mph (5 to 80 km/h)

Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 20 to 110

mph (30 to 180 km/h)

4

Oncoming motorcycles

mph (30 to 180 km/h)

If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is oper-

ating, it will be canceled:

• The accelerator pedal is strongly depressed

• The steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly

●Emergency steering assist

The emergency steering assist will not operate when the turn signal lights

are flashing.

The emergency steering assist will not operate when the VSC OFF indicator

is illuminated.

Relative speed between

your vehicle and object

Detectable objects

Vehicle speed

Preceding vehicles,

stopped vehicles, bicy- Approximately 25 to 50 Approximately 25 to 50

cles, pedestrians,

motorcycles

mph (40 to 80 km/h)

While the emergency steering assist is operating, if any of the following are

performed, emergency steering assist operation may be canceled:

• The accelerator pedal is strongly depressed

• The steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly

• The brake pedal is depressed

266

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●Intersection collision avoidance support (left/right turn)

The intersection collision avoidance support (for left/right turning vehicles)

will not operate when the turn signal lights are not flashing.

Relative speed

between your

vehicle and object

Detectable

objects

Oncomingvehicle

speed

Vehicle speed

Approximately 3 Approximately 3 Approximately 7

to 25 mph (5 to

40 km/h)

Oncoming vehi-

cles

to 45 mph (5 to to 70 mph (10 to

75 km/h)

115 km/h)

Approximately 3

to 20 mph (5 to

30 km/h)

Approximately 3

to 25 mph (5 to

40 km/h)

Pedestrians

Bicycles

-

Approximately 3

to 20 mph (5 to

30 km/h)

Approximately 3

to 30 mph (5 to

50 km/h)

-

Approximately 3 Approximately 3 Approximately 7

to 25 mph (5 to

40 km/h)

Oncoming motor-

cycles

to 45 mph (5 to to 70 mph (10 to

75 km/h) 115 km/h)

●Intersection collision avoidance support (crossing vehicles)

Relative speed

between your

vehicle and object

Detectable

objects

Crossing vehicle

speed

Vehicle speed

Your vehicle

speed or less

Approximately

25 mph or less

(40 km/h or

less)

Approximately 3

to 38 mph (5 to

60 km/h)

Approximately 3

to 38 mph (5 to

60 km/h)

Vehicles, Motor-

cycles (side)

●Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed

The Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed function will not operate when

the turn signal lights are flashing.

Relative speed between

your vehicle and object

Detectable objects

Vehicle speed

Preceding vehicles,

stopped vehicles,

Pedestrians, Bicycles,

Wall

Approximately 0 to 9

mph (0 to 15 km/h)

Approximately 0 to 9

mph (0 to 15 km/h)

While the Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed function is operating, if

267

4-5. Using the driving support systems

any of the following are performed, the low speed sudden acceleration sup-

pression function operation will be canceled:

• The accelerator pedal is released.

• The steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly

■Detection of detectable objects

Objects are detected based on their

size, shape, and movement.

Depending on the ambient bright-

ness, movement, posture and direc-

tion of a detectable object, it may

not be detected and the system may

not operate properly.

The system detects shapes, such as

the following, as detectable objects.

• When there are patterns or a

painting ahead of the vehicle that

may be mistaken for a detectable

object

• When passing a detectable object

that is changing lanes or turning

left/right

4

■Situations in which the system

may operate even though the

possibility of a collision is not

high

●In certain situations, such as the

following, the system may deter-

mine that the possibility of a colli-

sion is high and operate:

• When passing a detectable object

which is stopped to make a

left/right turn

• When passing a detectable object

• When changing lanes while over-

taking a detectable object

• When suddenly approaching a

detectable object

• When approaching a detectable

object or other object on the road-

side, such as guardrails, utility

poles, trees, walls, etc.

• When there is a detectable object

or other object by the roadside at

the entrance of a curve

• When a detectable object stops

immediately before entering the

path of the vehicle

• When passing through a location

with a structure above the road

(traffic sign, billboard, etc.)

268

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Situations in which the system

may not operate properly

●In certain situations, such as the

following, a detectable object may

not be detected by the front sen-

sors, and the system may not

operate properly:

• When a detectable object is

approaching your vehicle

• When your vehicle or a detectable

object is wandering

• When a detectable object makes

an abrupt maneuver (such as sud-

den swerving, acceleration or

deceleration)

• When suddenly approaching a

detectable object

• When the detectable object is

near a wall, fence, guardrail, man-

hole cover, steel plate on the road

surface, or another vehicle

• When there is a structure above a

detectable object

• When part of a detectable object

is hidden by another object (large

luggage, umbrella, guardrail, etc.)

• When multiple detectable objects

are overlapping

• When approaching an electric toll

gate barrier, parking lot barrier, or

other barrier that opens and

closes

• When turning left/right and an

oncoming vehicle, oncoming

motorcycle, pedestrian or bicycle

crosses in front of the vehicle

• When attempting to turn left/right

in front of an oncoming vehicle,

oncoming motorcycle, pedestrian

or bicycle

• When turning left/right and an

oncoming vehicle, oncoming

motorcycle, pedestrian or bicycle

stops or changes course immedi-

ately before entering the path of

the vehicle

• When turning left/right and an

oncoming vehicle turns left/right in

front of the vehicle

• When a bright light, such as the

sun, is reflecting off of a detect-

able object

• When a detectable object is white

and looks extremely bright

• When the color or brightness of a

detectable object causes it to

blend in with its surroundings

• When a detectable object cuts in

front of or suddenly emerges in

front of your vehicle

• When approaching a vehicle

which is diagonal

• When the steering wheel is oper-

ated toward the path of an oncom-

ing vehicle

• When there is an object moving

above or under the road

• If a bicycle is a child sized bicycle,

is carrying a large load, is carrying

an extra passenger, is carrying a

forward leaning rider, or has an

unusual shape (bicycles equipped

with a child seat, tandem bicycles,

etc.)

• If a pedestrian or bicycle is shorter

than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or

taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2

m).

• When the silhouette of a pedes-

trian or bicycle is unclear (such as

269

4-5. Using the driving support systems

when they are wearing a raincoat,

long skirt, etc.)

long in overall length, such as a

large truck, towing trailer, etc.

• When a pedestrian is bending for-

ward or squatting

• When a pedestrian or bicycle is

moving at high speed

• When a pedestrian is pushing a

stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or

other vehicle

●In addition to the preceding, in

certain situations, such as the fol-

lowing, the emergency steering

assist may not operate properly:

• When a detectable object is too

close to the vehicle

• When there is insufficient space to

perform evasive steering maneu-

vers or an obstruction exists in the

evasion direction

• When a detectable object blends

in with the surrounding area, such

as when it is dim (at dawn or dusk)

or dark (at night or in a tunnel)

• When the vehicle has not been

driven for a certain amount of time

after the engine was started

• While turning left/right or a few

seconds after turning left/right

• While driving around a curve and

a few seconds after driving around

a curve

• When turning left/right and an

oncoming vehicle is driving in a

lane 3 or more lanes from the

vehicle

• When turning left/right and the

direction of the vehicle differs

greatly from the direction traffic

flows in the oncoming lane

• When there is an oncoming vehi-

cle

●In addition to the preceding, in

certain situations, such as the fol-

lowing, walls may not be detected

as a target object and the Acceler-

ation Suppression at Low Speed

function may not operate properly:

• When scenery behind the wall is

visible, such as a glass door, grid

fence, etc.

• When the wall is slanted or low

• When the wall is narrow, such as

a pole, etc.

• When the wall is made of plants,

such as a hedge, etc.

4

• When the road, etc. is reflected on

the wall

• When the vehicle is approaching

the wall at an angle

Changing the pre-colli-

sion setting

 The pre-collision system can

be enabled/disabled through

a customize setting. (P.637)

• When turning left/right, a pedes-

trian or bicycle behind the vehicle

comes in front of it as if it over-

takes the vehicle

The system is enabled each time

the engine switch is turned to ON.

 When the system is disabled,

the PCS warning light will illu-

minate and a message will be

displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display.

• When at an intersection, the

approaching crossing vehicle is

 The pre-collision setting can

270

4-5. Using the driving support systems

be changed on the customize

settings. (P.637)

LTA (Lane Tracing

Assist)

 When the pre-collision warn-

ing timing is changed, the

emergency steering assist

timing will also be changed.

LTA functions

 When driving on a road with

clear lane lines with the

When “

(later)” is

dynamic radar cruise control

operating, lane lines and pre-

ceding and surrounding vehi-

cles are detected using the

front camera and radar sen-

sor, and the steering wheel is

operated to maintain the vehi-

cle’s lane position.

selected, the emergency

steering assist will not operate

in most cases.

 When the dynamic radar

cruise control is operating, the

pre-collision warning will

operate at the “

(Earlier)”

Use the this function only on high-

ways and expressways.

timing, regardless of the user

setting.

If the dynamic radar cruise control

is not operating, the function will not

operate.

In situations where the lane lines

are difficult to see or are not visible,

such as when in a traffic jam, sup-

port will be provided using the path

of preceding and surrounding vehi-

cles.

If the system determines that the

steering wheel has not been oper-

ated for a certain amount of time or

the steering wheel is not being

firmly gripped, the driver will be

alerted and this function will be

temporarily canceled.

If the steering wheel is firmly

gripped, the function will begin

operating again.

271

4-5. Using the driving support systems

4

 When the function is operat-

WARNING

ing, if the vehicle is likely to

depart from its lane, the driver

will be alerted via a display

and buzzer.

■Before using the LTA system

●Do not overly rely on the LTA

system. The LTA system is not a

system which provides auto-

mated assistance in driving and

it is not a system which reduces

the amount of attention neces-

sary for safe driving. The driver

is solely responsible for paying

attention to their surroundings

and operating the steering

When the buzzer sounds, check

the area around the vehicle and

carefully operate the steering wheel

to move the vehicle back to the

center of the lane.

wheel as necessary to ensure

safety. Also, the driver is

responsible for taking adequate

breaks when fatigued, such as

when driving for a long time.

●Failure to perform appropriate

driving operations and pay care-

ful attention may lead to an

accident.

●When not using the LTA system,

turn it off using the LTA switch.

272

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Lane departure warning func-

tion when the LTA is operating

■Operating conditions of func-

tion

●Even if the LDA warning method is

changed to vibration of the steer-

ing wheel, if the vehicle deviates

from the lane while the LTA is

operating, the warning buzzer will

sound to alert the driver.

This function is operable when all of

the following conditions are met:

●The LTA system detects lane lines

or the path of preceding or sur-

rounding vehicles.

●If steering wheel operation equiv-

alent to that necessary for a lane

change is detected, the system

will determine the vehicle is not

deviating from the lane and the

warning will not operate.

●The dynamic radar cruise control

is operating.

●The lane width is approximately

10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).

●The turn signal lever is not being

operated.

■Hands off steering wheel warn-

ing operation

●The vehicle is not being driven

around a sharp curve.

●When the system determines the

driver is not holding the steering

wheel, a message urging the

driver to grip the steering wheel

and the icon shown in the illustra-

tion will be displayed on the multi-

information display to warn the

driver. If the system detects that

the steering wheel is held, the

warning will be canceled. When

using the system, make sure to

grip the steering wheel firmly,

regardless of whether the warn-

ing is operating or not.

●The vehicle is not accelerating or

decelerating more than a certain

amount.

●The steering wheel is not being

turned with a large force.

●The hands off steering wheel

warning (P.272) is not operat-

ing.

●The vehicle is being driven in the

center of a lane.

●TDA (Trailer Driving Assist) is not

operating (P.308)

■Temporary cancelation of func-

tions

●When the operating conditions are

no longer met, a function may be

temporarily canceled. However,

when the operation conditions are

met again, operation of the func-

tion will automatically be restored.

(P.272)

●If the operating conditions of a

function are no longer met while

the function is operating, a buzzer

may sound to indicate that the

function has been temporarily

canceled.

●If no operations are detected for a

certain amount of time, the warn-

ing will operate, and the function

will be temporarily canceled. This

warning may also operate if the

driver only operates steering

wheel a small amount continu-

ously.

●The steering assist operation of

the function can be overridden by

the steering wheel operation of

the driver.

■Situations in which the hands

off steering wheel warning may

not operate properly

●Depending on the condition of the

273

4-5. Using the driving support systems

vehicle, handle control condition

●When a preceding or surround-

ing vehicle changes lanes (Your

vehicle may follow the preced-

ing or surrounding vehicle and

also change lanes)

and road surface, the warning

function may not operate.

Enabling/disabling the

system

The LTA will change between

ON/OFF each time the LTA

switch is pressed.

When the LTA is ON, the LTA indi-

cator will illuminate.

4

●When a preceding or surround-

ing vehicle is swaying (Your

vehicle may sway accordingly

and depart from the lane)

WARNING

●When a preceding or surround-

ing vehicle departs from a lane

(Your vehicle may follow the

preceding or surrounding vehi-

cle and also depart from the

lane)

■Situations in which the func-

tions may not operate prop-

erly

In the following situations, the

functions may not operate prop-

erly and the vehicle may depart

from its lane. Do not overly rely on

these functions. The driver is

solely responsible for paying

attention to their surroundings

and operating the steering wheel

as necessary to ensure safety.

●When a preceding or surround-

ing vehicle is being driven

extremely close to the left/right

lane line (Your vehicle may fol-

low the preceding or surround-

ing vehicle accordingly and

depart from the lane)

●When there are moving objects

or structures in the surrounding

area (Depending on the position

of the moving object or structure

relative to your vehicle, your

vehicle may sway)

●When the vehicle is struck by a

crosswind or the turbulence of

other nearby vehicles

274

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

●Situations in which the sensors

may not operate properly:

P.254

●Situations in which the lane may

not be detected: P.256

●When it is necessary to disable

the system: P.250

Operation display of steering wheel operation support

The operating state of the LTA system is indicated.

Lane dis-

play

Steering

icon

Indicator

Situation

LTA is on standby

White

Green

Gray/White

Green

Gray

LTA is operating

Green

The vehicle is departing the lane

toward the side which the lane dis-

play is flashing

Yellow

Flashing

Yellow

Flashing

Green

275

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LDA (Lane Departure

Alert)

Basic functions

The LDA system warns the

driver if the vehicle may deviate

from the current lane or course^*,

and also can slightly operate the

steering wheel to help avoid

deviation from the lane or

course^*.

The front camera is used to

detect lane lines or a course^*.

4

*

: Boundary between the asphalt

and grass, soil, etc., or structures,

such as a curb, guardrail, etc.

■ Lane departure prevention

function

■ Lane departure alert func-

tion

If the system determines that

the vehicle is likely to depart

from its lane or course^*, it pro-

vides assistance through steer-

ing wheel operations to help

avoid deviation from the lane or

course.

When the system determines

that the vehicle might depart

from its lane or course^*, a warn-

ing is displayed on a display,

and either a warning buzzer will

sound or the steering wheel will

vibrate to alert the driver.

If the system determines that the

steering wheel has not been oper-

ated for a certain amount of time or

the steering wheel is not being

firmly gripped, a warning message

may be displayed and a warning

buzzer may sound to alert the

driver.

Check the area around your vehicle

and carefully operate the steering

wheel to move the vehicle back to

*

the center of the lane or course .

If the system determines that the

vehicle may collide with a vehicle in

an adjacent lane, the lane depar-

ture alert will operate even if the

turn signals are operating.

If the system determines that the

vehicle may collide with a vehicle in

an adjacent lane, the lane depar-

ture prevention function will operate

even if the turn signals are operat-

ing.

*

: Boundary between the asphalt

and grass, soil, etc., or structures,

such as a curb, guardrail, etc.

*

: Boundary between the asphalt

276

4-5. Using the driving support systems

and grass, soil, etc., or structures,

such as a curb, guardrail, etc.

WARNING

■Before using the LDA system

●Do not overly rely on the LDA

system. The LDA system is not

a system which provides auto-

mated assistance in driving.

However, as it is not a system

which reduces the amount of

attention necessary for safe

driving. The driver is solely

responsible for paying attention

to their surroundings and oper-

ating the steering wheel as nec-

essary to ensure safety. Also,

the driver is responsible for tak-

ing adequate breaks when

fatigued, such as when driving

for a long time.

●Failure to perform appropriate

driving operations and pay care-

ful attention may lead to an

accident.

■ Break suggestion function

■Operating conditions of each

If the vehicle is swaying, a mes-

sage will be displayed and a

buzzer will sound to urge the

driver to take a break.

function

●Lane departure alert/prevention

function

This function is operable when all of

the following conditions are met:

• The vehicle speed is approxi-

mately 30 mph (50 km/h) or more.

Operation may be possible when

the vehicle speed is approximately

25 mph (40 km/h) or more if vehi-

cles, motorcycles, bicycles, or

pedestrians are detected near the

lane.

• The system recognizes a lane or

*

course . (When recognized on

only one side, the system will

operate only for the recognized

side.)

• The lane width is approximately

9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

• The turn signal lever is not being

operated.

(Except when a vehicle is

detected in the direction that the

turn signal lever is operated.)

277

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• The vehicle is not being driven

around a sharp curve.

• The vehicle is not accelerating or

decelerating more than a certain

amount.

●The steering assist operation of

the lane departure prevention

function can be overridden by the

steering wheel operation of the

driver.

• The steering wheel is not being

turned sufficiently to perform a

lane change.

• The VSC or TRAC system is not

turned off

*

: Boundary between the asphalt

and grass, soil, etc., or structures,

such as a curb, guardrail, etc.

■When towing another vehicle

*

: Boundary between the asphalt

and grass, soil, etc., or structures,

such as a curb, guardrail, etc.

P.308

■When lift up

P.257

■Hands off steering wheel warn-

■Temporary cancellation of func-

tions

ing operation

When the operating conditions are

no longer met, a function may be

temporarily canceled. However,

when the operation conditions are

met again, operation of the function

will automatically be restored.

(P.276)

In the following situations, a mes-

sage urging the driver to operate the

steering wheel and an icon will be

displayed and a buzzer will sound to

warn the driver. When using the sys-

tem, make sure to grip the steering

wheel firmly, regardless of whether

the warning is operating or not.

4

■Operation of the lane departure

alert function/lane departure

prevention function

●Depending on the vehicle speed,

road conditions, lane departure

angle, etc., operation of the lane

departure prevention function may

not be felt or the function may not

operate.

●Depending on the conditions, the

warning buzzer may operate even

if vibration is selected through a

customize setting.

●When the system determines that

the driver is not securely holding

the steering wheel, or the steering

wheel is not being operated when

the steering assist operation of the

lane departure prevention function

is operating

*

●If a course is not clear or straight,

the lane departure alert function or

lane departure prevention function

may not operate.

Except for Puerto Rico, A.Samoa:

The length of time that the warning

buzzer operates will become longer

as the frequency of the steering

assist operating increases. If the

system judges that the steering

wheel has been operated, the warn-

ing buzzer will stop.

●The lane departure alert function

or lane departure prevention func-

tion may not operate if the system

judges that the vehicle is inten-

tionally being steered to avoid a

pedestrian or parked vehicle.

●It may not be possible for the sys-

tem to judge if there is danger of a

collision with a vehicle in an adja-

cent lane.

For Puerto Rico, A.Samoa: The

length of time that the warning

buzzer operates will become longer

278

4-5. Using the driving support systems

as the frequency of the steering

assist operating increases. Even if

the system judges that the steering

wheel has been operated, the warn-

ing buzzer will sound for a certain

amount of time.

WARNING

■Situations in which the sys-

tem may not operate properly

In the following situations, the

system may not operate properly

and the vehicle may depart from

its lane. Do not overly rely on

these functions. The driver is

solely responsible for paying

attention to their surroundings

and operating the steering wheel

as necessary to ensure safety.

■Break suggestion function

This function is operable when all of

the following conditions are met:

●The vehicle speed is approxi-

mately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.

●The lane width is approximately

9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

●When the boundary between

the asphalt and grass, soil, etc.,

or structures, such as a curb,

guardrail, etc. is not clear or

straight

Depending on the condition of the

vehicle and road surface, the break

suggestion function may not oper-

ate.

●When the vehicle is struck by a

crosswind or the turbulence of

other nearby vehicles

●Situations in which the lane may

not be detected: P.256

●Situations in which the sensors

may not operate properly:

P.254

Changing LDA settings

●Situations in which some or all

of the functions of the system

cannot operate: P.256

 The LDA system can be

enabled/disabled through a

customize setting. (P.637)

●When it is necessary to disable

the system: P.250

 The settings of the LDA can

be changed on the customize

settings. (P.637)

279

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Displays and system operation

The operating state of the lane departure alert function and steering

assist operation of the lane departure prevention function are indi-

cated.

 Except for Puerto Rico, A.Samoa

Lane dis-

play

Steering

icon

Indicator

Situation

Not illumi- Not illumi- Not illumi-

System disabled

nated

White

nated

Not illumi- Lane lines are not detected by the

nated system

Gray

Not illumi- Lane lines are detected by the sys-

nated

4

tem

White

Lane departure alert function is

operating for the side which the lane

display is flashing

Not illumi-

nated

Yellow

Flashing

Yellow

Flashing

Lane departure prevention function

is operating for the side which the

lane display is illuminated

Green

Lane departure alert function/lane

departure prevention function is

operating for the side which the lane

display is flashing

Yellow

Flashing

Yellow

Flashing

280

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 For Puerto Rico, A.Samoa

Lane dis-

play

Steering

icon

Indicator

Situation

Not illumi- Not illumi-

nated

System disabled

nated

Yellow Illumi-

nated

Not illumi-

nated

Not illumi- Lane lines are not detected by the

nated system

Gray

Not illumi-

nated

Not illumi- Lane lines are detected by the sys-

tem

nated

White

Lane departure alert function is

operating for the side which the lane

display is flashing

Not illumi-

nated

Yellow

Flashing

Yellow

Flashing

Lane departure prevention function

is operating for the side which the

lane display is illuminated

Green

Lane departure alert function/lane

departure prevention function is

operating for the side which the lane

display is flashing

Yellow

Flashing

Yellow

Flashing

281

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●The proactive driving assist is

PDA (Proactive driv-

not a system which reduces the

amount of attention necessary

for safe driving. Even if the sys-

tem is operating correctly, the

surrounding conditions as rec-

ognized by the driver and

ing assist)

When a detectable object

(P.282) is detected, the

proactive driving assist

operates the brakes and

steering wheel to help pre-

vent the vehicle from

approaching too close to

the object.

detected by the system may dif-

fer. It is necessary for the driver

to pay attention, assess risks,

and ensure safety. Over-reli-

ance on this system to drive the

vehicle safely may lead to an

accident resulting in death or

serious injury.

●Proactive driving assist is not a

system which allows for inatten-

tive driving and is not a system

which assists in poor visibility

conditions. The driver is solely

responsible for paying attention

to their surroundings and driving

safely.

WARNING

■For safe use

Driving safely is solely the respon-

sibility of the driver.

4

●The proactive driving assist is

designed to provide some

assistance for regular braking

and steering operations, as well

as helping to prevent the vehicle

from approaching too close to a

detectable object. However, the

scope of this assistance is lim-

ited.

■When turning proactive driv-

ing assist off

●Situations in which the sensors

may not operate properly:

P.254

●When it is necessary to disable

the system: P.250

The driver should perform brake

and steering operations as neces-

sary. Read the following items

carefully. Do not overly rely on the

proactive driving assist and

■When towing another vehicle

P.308

■When lift up

P.257

always drive carefully. (P.284)

282

4-5. Using the driving support systems

System operating conditions and detectable objects

According to the driving conditions, the operation and detectable

objects of the proactive driving assist will change as follows.

Detectable

objects

Function

Conditions

Operation

Assistance with

some brake oper-

ations is pro-

A detectable

 Pedestrians

 Bicyclists

object is detected vided in order to

crossing the road reduce the possi-

bility of a colli-

sion.

Assistance with

some brake and

steering wheel

operations are

provided accord-

ing to the sur-

rounding

conditions to help

prevent the vehi-

cle from

Obstacle Antici-

pation Assist

(OAA)

A detectable

 Pedestrians

 Bicyclists

 Parked vehicles

object is detected

approaching too

on the side of the

road

close to a

detected object.

Assistance with

steering wheel

operations is pro-

vided within a

range that the

vehicle will not

deviate from its

current lane.

283

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Detectable

objects

Function

Conditions

Operation

The vehicle is

A preceding vehi- gently deceler-

cle or an adjacent ated so that the  Preceding vehi-

vehicle cutting in vehicle-to-vehi- cles

front of the vehi- cle distance will  Motorcycles

cle is detected

not be exces-

sively short.

Deceleration

Assist (DA)

The vehicle is

gently deceler-

ated if the vehicle

A curve is

detected ahead of speed is deter- None

the vehicle

mined to be too

high for the curve

ahead.

4

The system antic-

ipates the driver’s

operation and

supports the

operation of the

steering wheel.

Steering Assist

(SA)

Lane is detected

None

Approximately 5 to 80 mph (10 to

140 km/h)

■Vehicle speeds at which the

system can operate

■System operation will be can-

celed when

●Detectable object crossing the

road assistance

●In the following situations, system

operation will be canceled:

• When the dynamic radar cruise

control or cruise control is operat-

ing

Approximately 20 to 35 mph (30 to

60 km/h)

●Detectable object on the side of

the road assistance

• When the PCS is off

Approximately 20 to 35 mph (30 to

60 km/h)

• Situations in which some or all of

the functions of the system cannot

operate: P.256

• When the P, R or N shift position is

selected

●Preceding vehicle deceleration

assistance

Approximately 15 mph (20 km/h) or

more

• The driver’s seat belt is unfas-

tened

●In the following situations, the

brake operation assist will be can-

celed:

• Approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or

less

• When a certain vehicle speed has

●Curve deceleration assistance

Approximately 15 mph (20 km/h) or

more

●Steering assist within a lane

284

4-5. Using the driving support systems

been reached, as judged by the

system, according to the sur-

rounding conditions

●When there are objects (guard-

rails, power poles, trees, walls,

fences, poles, traffic cones,

mailboxes, etc.) in the surround-

ing area

●In the following situations, system

operation may be canceled:

• When the brake control or output

restriction control of a driving sup-

port system operates (For exam-

ple: PCS, drive-start control)

• When the system determines that

a detected object has moved

away from the vehicle

●When there are patterns or a

painting ahead of the vehicle

that may be mistaken for a

detectable object

●When passing through a place

with a low structure above the

road (tunnel with a low ceiling,

traffic sign, signboard, etc.)

• Vehicles with SDM (Stabilizer with

Disconnection Mechanism): When

SDM (Stabilizer with Disconnec-

tion Mechanism) is operating:

P.436

●When driving on snowy, icy, or

rutted roads

• When lane lines can no longer be

detected

●When a detectable object is

approaching your vehicle

• When the brake pedal has been

depressed

• When the accelerator pedal has

been depressed

●When your vehicle or a detect-

able object is wandering

• When the steering wheel has

been operated with more than a

certain amount of force

• When the turn signal lever is oper-

ated to the left/right turn position

●When the movement of a

detectable object changes

(change in direction, sudden

acceleration or deceleration,

etc.)

WARNING

●When suddenly approaching a

detectable object

■Situations in which the sys-

tem may not operate properly

●When a preceding vehicle or

motorcycle is not directly in front

of your vehicle

●Situations in which the lane may

not be detected: P.256

●When there is a structure above

●When a detectable object stops

immediately before entering the

path of the vehicle

a detectable object

●When part of a detectable

object is hidden by another

object (large luggage, umbrella,

guardrail, etc.)

●When passing extremely close

to a detectable object behind a

guardrail, fence, etc.

●When multiple detectable

objects are overlapping

●When changing lanes while

overtaking a detectable object

●When a bright light, such as the

sun or headlights of another

vehicle, is reflecting off of the

detectable object

●When passing a detectable

object that is changing lanes or

turning left/right

●When the detectable object is

white and looks extremely bright

285

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●When the vehicle has not been

driven for a certain amount of

time after the engine was

started

WARNING

●When the color or brightness of

the detectable object causes it

to blend in with its surroundings

●While turning left or right or a

few seconds after turning left or

right

●When a detectable object cuts

in front of or emerges from

beside a vehicle

●While changing lanes or a few

seconds after changing lanes

●When approaching a vehicle

ahead which is perpendicular or

at an angle to the vehicle, or is

facing the vehicle

●When entering a curve, driving

around a curve and a few sec-

onds after driving around a

curve

●If a parked vehicle is perpendic-

ular or at an angle to the vehicle

●When a bicycle is a child sized

bicycle, is carrying a large load,

is carrying an extra passenger,

or has an unusual shape (bicy-

cles equipped with a child seat,

tandem bicycles, etc.)

Changing proactive driv-

ing assist settings

4

 The proactive driving assist

can be enabled/disabled

through a customize setting.

(P.637)

●When a pedestrian or bicyclist is

shorter than approximately 3.2

ft. (1 m) or taller than approxi-

mately 6.5 ft. (2 m)

 The following settings of the

proactive driving assist can be

changed through customize

settings. (P.637)

●When the silhouette of a pedes-

trian or bicyclist is unclear (such

as when they are wearing a

raincoat, long skirt, etc.)

●When a pedestrian or bicyclist is

bending forward or squatting

●When a pedestrian or bicyclist is

moving at high speed

●When a pedestrian is pushing a

stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or

other vehicle

●When a detectable object

blends in with the surrounding

area, such as when it is dim (at

dawn or dusk) or dark (at night,

in a tunnel, etc.)

●When the lane width is 13.1 ft.

(4 m) or more

●When the lane width is 8.2 ft.

(2.5 m) or less

286

4-5. Using the driving support systems

System operation display

Depending on the situation, the following indicators or icons will be

displayed.

Some icons cannot be displayed unless the display is changed to

the driving safety support function information screen.

Icon

Meaning

 White: Monitoring for detectable

objects

 Green: Detectable object crossing

the road or detectable object on

the side of the road assistance

operating

A pedestrian has been detected as

crossing the road or on the side of

the road and brake or steering assis-

tance is operating

A vehicle has been detected on the

side of the road and brake or steer-

ing operation assistance is being

performed

 Steering operation assistance is

being performed to prevent the

vehicle from approaching too close

to a detectable object on the side

of the road

 When the steering assist is operat-

ing

Preceding vehicle deceleration

assistance is being performed

Warning to maintain appropriate

vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Curve deceleration assistance is

being performed

287

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Hands off steering wheel warn-

ing operation

In the following situations, a mes-

sage urging the driver to grip the

steering wheel and the icon shown

in the illustration will be displayed on

the display to warn the driver. If the

system detects that the steering

wheel is held, the warning will be

canceled. When using the system,

make sure to grip the steering wheel

firmly, regardless of whether the

warning is operating or not.

4

●When assistance to a detectable

object crossing the road or assis-

tance to a detectable object on the

side of the road is performed and

the system determines the driver

is not holding the steering wheel

If no operations are detected for a

certain amount of time, a buzzer will

sound, the warning will operate.

This warning may also operate if the

driver only operates steering wheel

a small amount continuously.

■Warning operation after preced-

ing vehicle deceleration assis-

tance has ended

After preceding vehicle decelera-

tion assistance has ended, if the

driver does not operate the brake

pedal or accelerator pedal and the

vehicle approaches the preceding

vehicle, the display will flash and a

buzzer will sound to urge the driver

to decelerate. If the system deter-

mines that the driver is operating the

brake pedal or accelerator pedal,

the warning will be canceled.

288

4-5. Using the driving support systems

RSA (Road Sign

Display Function

*

Assist)

 When the front camera

detects a sign or information

of a sign is available from the

navigation system (if

*

: If equipped

The RSA system detects

specific road signs using

the front camera and/or

navigation system (if

equipped) (when speed limit

information is available)

and warns the driver via dis-

plays and buzzers.

equipped), the sign will be

displayed on the display.

 Multiple signs can be dis-

played.

Depending on the specifications of

the vehicle, the number of dis-

played signs may be limited.

WARNING

■Operating conditions of sign

■For safe use

display

●Driving safely is solely the

responsibility of the driver. Pay

careful attention to the sur-

rounding conditions in order to

ensure safe driving.

Signs will be displayed when the fol-

lowing conditions are met:

●The system has detected a sign

In the following situations, a dis-

played sign may stop being dis-

played:

●Do not rely solely upon the

RSA. The RSA assists the

driver by providing road sign

information, but it is not a

replacement for the driver’s own

vision and awareness. Driving

safely is solely the responsibility

of the driver. Pay careful atten-

tion to the surrounding condi-

tions in order to ensure safe

driving.

●When a new sign has not been

detected for a certain distance

●When the system determines that

the road being driven on has

changed, such as after a left or

right turn

■Situations in which the display

function may not operate prop-

erly

■Situations in which the RSA

should not be used

In the following situations, the RSA

system may not operate properly

and may not detect signs or may

display the incorrect sign. However,

this does not indicate a malfunction.

When it is necessary to disable

the system: P.250

■Situations in which the sys-

tem may not operate properly

●When a sign is dirty, faded, tilted

or bent

Situations in which the sensors

may not operate properly: P.254

●When the contrast of an electronic

sign is low

●When all or part of a sign is hidden

by a tree, utility pole, etc.

●When a sign is detected by the

front camera for a short amount of

289

4-5. Using the driving support systems

time

display will be emphasized

and a buzzer will sound.

●When the driving state (turning,

changing lanes, etc.) is judged

incorrectly

 When the RSA system

detects a do not enter sign

●When a sign is immediately after a

freeway junction or in an adjacent

lane just before merging

and determines that the vehi-

cle has entered a no-entry

area, the do not enter sign

displayed on the display will

flash and a buzzer will sound.

●When stickers are attached to the

rear of a preceding vehicle

●When a sign similar to a system

compatible sign is detected as a

system compatible sign

■Operating conditions of the

notification functions

●When a speed limit sign for a

frontage road is within detection

range of the front camera

●Excess speed notification function

●When driving around a round-

about

This function will operate when the

following condition is met:

●When a sign intended for trucks,

etc. is detected

• A speed limit road sign is recog-

nized by the system.

4

●When a sign has a supplemental

sign (end point, day of week, time

of day, etc.)

●No entry notification function

This function will operate when all of

the following conditions are met:

• More than one no entry road signs

are recognized by the system

simultaneously.

• The vehicle is passing between no

entry road signs recognized by the

system.

●When there is a sign within a traf-

fic restricted area, such as a road-

works area

●Vehicles with navigation system:

When the navigation system map

data is out of date

●Vehicles with navigation system:

When the navigation system can-

not be used

Types of road signs sup-

ported

In this case, the speed limit signs

displayed on the multi-information

display and navigation system dis-

play may differ.

 The following types of road

signs can be displayed.

However, non-standard or recently

introduced traffic signs may not be

displayed.

Notification function

In the following situations, the

RSA system will output a warn-

ing to notify the driver.

 If the vehicle speed exceeds

the speed warning threshold

of the speed limit sign dis-

played on the display, the sign

290

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Dynamic radar cruise

control

Speed limit

This dynamic radar cruise

control detects the pres-

ence of vehicles ahead,

determines the current vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance, and

operates to maintain a suit-

able distance from the vehi-

cle ahead. The desired

vehicle-to-vehicle distance

can be set by operating the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance

switch.

Do Not Enter

No U-turn

No Turn On Red

Stop

Use the dynamic radar

cruise control only on high-

ways and expressways.

WARNING

Yield

■For safe use

●Driving safely is solely the

responsibility of the driver. Do

not overly rely on this system,

and pay careful attention to the

surrounding conditions in order

to ensure safe driving.

Warning

Changing RSA settings

●The dynamic radar cruise con-

trol provides driving assistance

to reduce the driver’s burden.

However, there are limitations to

the assistance provided.

Read the following items care-

fully. Do not overly rely on this

system and always drive care-

fully.

The following settings of the

RSA can be changed through

customize settings. (P.637)

Conditions under which the sys-

tem may not operate correctly:

P.297

291

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●Details of support provided for

the driver’s vision

WARNING

●Set the speed appropriately

according to the speed limit,

traffic flow, road conditions,

weather conditions, etc. The

driver is responsible for confirm-

ing the set speed.

The dynamic radar cruise con-

trol is only intended to help the

driver in determining the dis-

tance between the driver’s own

vehicle and a designated pre-

ceding vehicle. It is not a sys-

tem which allows for careless or

inattentive driving, and is not a

system which assists in poor

visibility conditions.

●Even if the system is operating

correctly, the condition of a pre-

ceding vehicle as recognized by

the driver and detected by the

system may differ. Therefore, it

is necessary for the driver to

pay attention, assess risks, and

ensure safety. Over-reliance on

this system to drive the vehicle

safely may lead to an accident

resulting in death or serious

injury.

The driver must pay attention to

their surroundings, even when

the vehicle stops.

●Details of support provided for

the driver’s judgement

The dynamic radar cruise con-

trol determines whether the dis-

tance between the driver’s own

vehicle and a designated pre-

ceding vehicle is within a set

range. It is not capable of mak-

ing any other type of judgement.

Therefore, it is absolutely nec-

essary for the driver to remain

vigilant and to determine

4

■Precautions for the driving

assist systems

Observe the following precau-

tions, as there are limitations to

the assistance provided by the

system. Over-reliance on this sys-

tem may lead to an accident

whether or not there is a possi-

bility of danger.

resulting in death or serious injury.

●Details of support provided for

the driver’s operation

The dynamic radar cruise con-

trol does not include functions

which will prevent or avoid colli-

sions with vehicles ahead of

your vehicle. Therefore, if there

is ever any possibility of danger,

the driver must take immediate

and direct control of the vehicle

and act appropriately in order to

ensure safety.

292

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■Situations in which the

dynamic radar cruise control

should not be used

Do not use the dynamic radar

cruise control in the following situ-

ations. As the system will not be

able to provide appropriate con-

trol, using it may lead to an acci-

dent resulting in death or serious

injury.

●Roads where there are pedes-

trians, cyclists, etc.

●When driving on a highway or

expressway entrance or exit

●When the approach warning

sounds frequently

●Situations in which the sensors

may not operate properly:

P.254

●When it is necessary to disable

the system: P.250

■When towing another vehicle

P.308

■When lift up

P.257

293

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Basic functions

Constant speed cruising:

4

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle drives at the speed set by the driver.

If the set vehicle speed is exceeded while driving down a hill, the set vehicle

speed display will blink and a buzzer will sound.

Deceleration and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set vehicle

speed is detected

When a vehicle is detected driving ahead of your vehicle, the vehicle auto-

matically decelerates and if a greater reduction in vehicle speed is neces-

sary, the brakes are applied (the stop lights will come on at this time). The

vehicle is controlled to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the

driver, in accordance with changes in the speed of the preceding vehicle. If

vehicle deceleration is not sufficient and the vehicle approaches the vehicle

ahead, the approach warning will sound.

Acceleration

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower

than the set vehicle speed

The vehicle accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached and then

resumes constant speed cruising.

Starting off:

If a preceding vehicle stops, the vehicle will also stop (controlled

stop). After the preceding vehicle starts off, pressing the “RES”

switch or depressing the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up

cruising (start off operation). If a start off operation is not per-

294

4-5. Using the driving support systems

formed, the controlled stop will continue.

System components

Using the dynamic radar

cruise control

■ Meter display

■ Setting the vehicle speed

1 Press the driving assist mode

select switch to select Adap-

tive Cruise Mode.

The dynamic radar cruise control

indicator will illuminate.

Multi-information display

Set vehicle speed

Indicators

■ Switches

2 Using the accelerator pedal,

accelerate or decelerate to

the desired vehicle speed

(approximately 20 mph [30

km/h] or more), and press the

driving assist switch to set

the set vehicle speed.

The set vehicle speed will be dis-

played on the multi-information dis-

play.

Driving assist switch

“+” switch/“RES” switch

Cancel switch

The vehicle speed at the moment

the switch is released will be the set

vehicle speed.

“-” switch

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

switch

Driving assist mode select

switch

295

4-5. Using the driving support systems

or decreases in 5 km/h (3.1 mph) or

5 mph (8 km/h) increments continu-

ously while the switch is pressed

and held

■ Adjusting the set vehicle

speed

 Adjusting the set vehicle

speed using the switches

■ Increasing the set vehicle

speed using the accelerator

pedal

To change the set vehicle

speed, press the “+” switch or “-”

switch until the desired speed is

displayed.

1 Depress the accelerator

pedal to accelerate the vehi-

cle to the desired vehicle

speed.

2 Press the “+” switch.

■ Canceling/resuming control

4

1 Increase set vehicle speed

2 Decrease set vehicle speed

Short press adjustment: Press the

switch

Long press adjustment: Press and

hold the switch until the desired set

vehicle speed is reached.

1 Press the cancel switch or

driving assist switch to cancel

control.

The set vehicle speed will

increase or decrease as follows:

Control will also be canceled if the

brake pedal is depressed.

(If the vehicle has been stopped by

system control, depressing the

brake pedal will not cancel control.)

 Except for Canada

Short press adjustment: Increases

or decreases by 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

each time the switch is pressed

2 Press the “RES” switch to

resume control.

Long press adjustment: Increases

or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

increments continuously while the

switch is pressed and held

■ Changing the vehicle-to-

vehicle distance

Each time the switch is pressed,

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

setting will change as follows:

 For Canada

Short press adjustment: By 1 km/h

(0.6 mph) or 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each

time the switch is pressed

If a preceding vehicle is detected,

the preceding vehicle mark

will

Long press adjustment: Increases

296

4-5. Using the driving support systems

driving at a speed that exceeds

the system’s upper limit, the set

vehicle speed will be the system’s

upper limit.

be displayed.

■Accelerating after setting the

vehicle speed

As with normal driving, acceleration

can be performed by depressing the

accelerator pedal. After accelerat-

ing, the vehicle will return to the set

vehicle speed. However, while in

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, the vehicle speed may

decrease to below the set vehicle

speed in order to maintain the dis-

tance from the preceding vehicle.

Vehicle- Approximate

Illustra-

tion

Number

to-vehi- Distance (Vehi-

cle dis- cle Speed: 60

tance mph [100 km/h])

■When the vehicle is stopped by

system control during follow-up

cruising

Extra

long

Approximately

200 ft. (60 m)

1

2

3

4

●When the “RES” switch is pressed

while the vehicle is stopped by

system control, if the preceding

vehicle starts off within approxi-

mately 3 seconds, follow-up cruis-

ing will resume.

Approximately

145 ft. (45 m)

Long

Medium

Short

Approximately

100 ft. (30 m)

●If the preceding vehicle starts off

within approximately 3 seconds of

the vehicle being stopped by sys-

tem control, follow-up cruising will

resume.

Approximately

85 ft. (25 m)

The actual vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance varies in accordance with the

vehicle speed. Also, when the vehi-

cle is stopped by system control, it

will be stopped at a certain distance

from the preceding vehicle,

■Automatic cancelation of vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control

mode

In the following situations, vehicle-

to-vehicle distance control mode will

be canceled automatically:

depending on the situation, regard-

less of the setting.

●When the brake control or output

restriction control of a driving sup-

port system operates

(For example: Pre-Collision Sys-

tem, drive-start control)

■Operating conditions

●The D shift position is selected.

●When the parking brake has been

operated

●The desired set speed can be set

when the vehicle speed is approx-

imately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.

• If the vehicle speed is set while

driving at below approximately 20

mph (30 km/h), the set vehicle

speed will be approximately 20

mph (30 km/h).

●When the driver’s seat belt is

unfastened while driving

●When the Pre-Collision System is

disabled

●When the vehicle is stopped by

system control on a steep incline

• If the vehicle speed is set while

297

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●When any of the following are

detected while the vehicle is

stopped by system control:

• The driver’s seat belt is unfas-

tened

• The driver’s door is opened

• Approximately 3 minutes have

elapsed since the vehicle was

stopped

As the sensor may not be able to

correctly detect a vehicle, the sys-

tem may not operate properly.

●When a preceding vehicle brakes

suddenly

●When changing lanes at low

speeds, such as in a traffic jam

The parking brake may be actived

automatically.

Approach warning

In situations where the vehicle

approaches a preceding vehicle

and the system cannot provide

sufficient deceleration, such as

if a vehicle cuts in front of the

vehicle, a warning display will

flash and a buzzer will sound to

alert the driver. Depress the

brake pedal to ensure appropri-

ate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

●Situations in which some or all of

the functions of the system cannot

operate: P.256

■Dynamic radar cruise control

system warning messages and

buzzers

For safe use: P.250

■Preceding vehicles that the sen-

sor may not detect correctly

4

In the following situations, depend-

ing on the conditions, if the system

cannot provide sufficient decelera-

tion or acceleration is necessary,

operate the brake pedal or accelera-

tor pedal.

■ Warnings may not occur

when

In the following situations, the

warning may not operate even

though the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance is short.

As the sensor may not be able to

correctly detect these types of vehi-

cles, the approach warning

(P.297) may not operate.

●When a vehicle cuts in front of

your vehicle or changes lanes

away from your vehicle extremely

slowly or quickly

 When the preceding vehicle is

traveling at the same speed

or faster than your vehicle

●When changing lanes

 When the preceding vehicle is

traveling at an extremely low

speed

●When a preceding vehicle is driv-

ing at a low speed

●When a vehicle is stopped in the

same lane as the vehicle

 Immediately after the vehicle

speed has been set

●When a motorcycle is traveling in

the same lane as the vehicle

■Conditions under which the

system may not operate cor-

rectly

 When the accelerator pedal is

depressed

In the following situations, operate

the brake pedal (or accelerator

pedal, depending on the situation)

as necessary.

298

Curve speed reduction

4-5. Using the driving support systems

approximately 50 mph (80 km/h)

or more and a lane change to

the passing lane is performed,

when the turn signal lever is

operated and the lane is

function

When a curve is detected, the

vehicle speed will begin being

reduced. When the curve ends,

the vehicle speed reduction will

end.

changed, the vehicle will accel-

erate up to the set speed to

assist in overtaking.

The system’s recognition of which

lane is the passing lane may be

based solely on the location of the

steering wheel in the vehicle (left-

hand drive/right-hand drive). If the

vehicle is driven in a location where

the passing lane is on the opposite

side of that where the vehicle was

originally sold, the vehicle may

accelerate when the turn signal

lever is operated away from the

passing lane. (e.g. The vehicle was

manufactured for a right-hand traf-

fic location, but is being driven in a

left-hand traffic location. The vehi-

cle may accelerate when the turn

signal lever is operated to the right.)

Depending on the situation, the

vehicle speed will then return to the

set vehicle speed.

In situations where vehicle-to-vehi-

cle distance control needs to oper-

ate, such as when a preceding

vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle,

the curve speed reduction function

will be canceled.

If your vehicle is being driven at

approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) or

more and the lane is changed to

that with a vehicle traveling slower

than your vehicle, when the turn

signal lever is operated the vehicle

will gradually decelerate to assist in

changing lanes.

■Situations in which the curve

speed reduction function may

not operate

In situations such as the following,

the curve speed reduction function

may not operate:

●When the vehicle is being driven

around a gentle curve

Changing Dynamic radar

cruise control settings

●When the accelerator pedal is

being depressed

●When the vehicle is being driven

around an extremely short curve

The settings of Dynamic radar

cruise control can be changed

through customize settings.

(P.637)

Support for lane change

If your vehicle is being driven at

299

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Display and system operation state

The operating state of Dynamic radar cruise control is indicated.

Indicator

Multi-information display

Situation

Dynamic

Vehicle-to-vehicle

distance setting:

Gray

radar cruise

control being

OFF

White

Vehicle-to-vehicle

distance setting:

Blue

Constant

speed cruis-

ing

Green

Set vehicle speed:

Green

4

Vehicle-to-vehicle

distance setting:

Blue

Follow-up

cruising

Set vehicle speed:

Green

Preceding vehicle:

White

Vehicle-to-vehicle

distance setting:

Orange flashing

Approach

warning

Set vehicle speed:

Green

Preceding vehicle:

Orange flashing

300

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Indicator

Multi-information display

Vehicle-to-vehicle

Situation

distance setting:

Gray

Accelerating

with the

accelerator

pedal

Set vehicle speed:

White

Green

Preceding vehicle:

Gray

Set vehicle speed: Set vehicle

Green in reverse

display

speed being

exceeded

Green

Vehicle-to-vehicle

distance setting:

Gray

Vehicle in

Set vehicle speed: controlled

White

stop

Green

Preceding vehicle:

Gray

301

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●On steep downhills, or where

there are sudden changes

between sharp up and down

Cruise control

gradients

The vehicle can be driven at

a set speed even if the

accelerator pedal is not

depressed.

Vehicle speed may exceed the

set speed when driving down a

steep hill.

●When it is necessary to disable

the system: P.250

Use the cruise control only

on highways and express-

ways.

■When towing another vehicle

P.308

■When lift up

P.257

WARNING

■For safe use

●Driving safely is solely the

responsibility of the driver.

Therefore, do not overly rely on

this system. The driver is solely

responsible for paying attention

to the vehicle’s surroundings

and driving safely.

System components

4

■ Meter display

●Set the speed appropriately

according to the speed limit,

traffic flow, road conditions,

weather conditions, etc. The

driver is responsible for confirm-

ing the set speed.

■Situations in which cruise

control should not be used

Set vehicle speed

Cruise control indicator

■ Switches

Do not use the cruise control in

the following situations. As the

system will not be able to provide

appropriate control, using it may

lead to an accident resulting in

death or serious injury.

●On roads with sharp bends

●On winding roads

●On slippery roads, such as

those covered with rain, ice or

snow

Driving assist switch

302

4-5. Using the driving support systems

vehicle speed.

“+” switch/“RES” switch

Cancel switch

“-” switch

Driving assist mode select

switch

Using the cruise control

■ Adjusting the set vehicle

speed

■ Setting the vehicle speed

1 Press the driving assist mode

select switch to select Cruise

Control Mode.

 Adjusting the set vehicle

speed using the switches

The cruise control indicator will illu-

minate.

To change the set vehicle

speed, press the “+” or “-” switch

until the desired speed is dis-

played.

2 Using the accelerator pedal,

accelerate to the desired

vehicle speed (approxi-

mately 20 mph [30 km/h] or

more), and press the driving

assist switch to set the set

vehicle speed.

1 Increase set vehicle speed

2 Decrease set vehicle speed

The set vehicle speed will

increase or decrease as follows:

The vehicle speed at the moment

the switch is released will be the set

Fine adjustment: By 0.6 mph (1

km/h) or 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each

time the switch is pressed

Large adjustment: Increases con-

tinuously while the switch is

pressed and held

303

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●When the parking brake has been

operated

 Increasing the set vehicle

speed using the accelerator

pedal

●When the driver’s seat belt is

unfastened

1 Depress the accelerator

pedal to accelerate the vehi-

cle to the desired vehicle

speed.

●Situations in which some or all of

the functions of the system cannot

operate: P.256

2 Press the “+” switch.

■ Canceling/resuming control

4

1 Press the cancel switch or

driving assist switch to cancel

control.

Control will also be canceled if the

brake pedal is depressed.

2 Press the “RES” switch to

resume control.

■Automatic cancelation of the

cruise control

In the following situations, the cruise

control will be canceled automati-

cally:

●When the vehicle speed drops

approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)

or more below the set vehicle

speed

●When the vehicle speed drops

below approximately 20 mph (30

km/h)

●When the brake control or output

restriction control of a driving sup-

port system operates (For exam-

ple: PCS, drive-start control)

304

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Display and system operation state

The operating state of cruise control is indicated.

Indicator

Multi-information display

Blank

Situation

Cruise con-

trol being

OFF

White

Constant

speed cruis-

ing

Set vehicle speed:

Green

Set vehicle speed: Set vehicle

Green in reverse

display

speed being

exceeded

305

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Emergency Driving

Stop System

WARNING

■For safe use

●Driving safely is solely the

responsibility of the driver. Pay

careful attention to the sur-

rounding conditions in order to

ensure safe driving. The emer-

gency driving stop system is

designed to provide support in

an emergency where it is diffi-

cult for the driver to continue

driving, such as if they have had

a medical emergency. It is not

designed to support driving

while drowsy or in poor physical

health, or inattentive driving.

The emergency driving stop

system is a system which

automatically decelerates

and stops the vehicle within

its lane if the driver

becomes unable to con-

tinue driving the vehicle,

such as if they have suf-

fered a medical emergency,

etc.

●Although the emergency driv-

ing stop system is designed to

decelerate the vehicle within its

lane to help avoid or help

reduce the impact of a collision

if the system determines that it

is difficult for the driver to con-

tinue driving, its effectiveness

may change according to vari-

ous conditions. Therefore, it

may not always be able to

During LTA (Lane Tracing

Assist) control, if the sys-

tem does not detect driving

operations, such as if the

driver is not holding the

steering wheel, and deter-

mines the driver is not

responsive, the vehicle will

be decelerated and stopped

within its current lane to

help avoid a collision or

reduce the impact of a colli-

sion.

4

achieve the same level of per-

formance. Also, if the operating

conditions are not met, this

function will not operate.

●After the emergency driving

stop system operates, if driving

becomes possible again, imme-

diately begin driving again or, if

necessary, park the vehicle on

the shoulder of the road and set

a warning reflector and flare to

warn other drivers of your

stopped vehicle.

●After this system operates, pas-

sengers should attend to the

driver as necessary and take

appropriate hazard prevention

measures, such as moving to a

place where safety can be

ensured, such as the shoulder

of the road or behind a guard-

rail.

306

4-5. Using the driving support systems

or more

WARNING

■Operation cancelation condi-

●This system detects the condi-

tion of the driver through the

operation of the steering wheel.

This system may operate if the

driver is aware but intentionally

and continuously does not oper-

ate the vehicle. Also, the system

may not operate if it cannot

tions

In the following situations, system

operation will be canceled:

●When LTA control has been can-

celed (the LTA switch has been

pressed, etc.)

●When the dynamic radar cruise

control has been canceled

determine that the driver is not

responsive, such as if they are

leaning on the steering wheel.

●When driver operations are

detected (the steering wheel is

held, the brake pedal, accelerator

pedal, parking brake, hazard light

switch, or turn signal lever is oper-

ated)

■When towing another vehicle

P.308

■When lift up

P.257

●When the driving assist switch is

pressed while in the stop and hold

phase

Summary of the system

●When the engine switch has been

turned from ON to OFF

Operation of this system is sep-

arated into 4 control states.

Through control state “warning

phase 1” and “warning phase 2”,

the system determines if the

driver is aware and responsive

while outputting a warning and

controlling the vehicle speed. If

the system determines the

driver is not responsive, it will

operate in control state “deceler-

ation stop phase” and “stop hold

phase” and decelerate and stop

the vehicle. It will then operate

continuously in “stop hold

●Situations in which some or all of

the functions of the system cannot

operate: P.256

■LTA control when operation is

canceled

When emergency driving stop sys-

tem operation is canceled, LTA con-

trol may also be canceled.

Warning phase 1

If driving operations are not

detected after the hands off

steering wheel warning oper-

ates, a buzzer will sound inter-

mittently and a message will be

displayed to warn the driver, and

the system will judge if the driver

is responsive or not. If driving

operations, such as holding the

steering wheel, are not per-

formed within a certain amount

of time, the system will enter

warning phase 2.

phase”.

■Operating conditions

This system operates when all of

the following conditions are met:

●When the LTA is on

●When the vehicle speed is

approximately 30 mph (50 km/h)

307

4-5. Using the driving support systems

gency.

Warning phase 2

■Restricted functions after the

operation is canceled

After entering warning phase 2,

a buzzer will sound in short

intervals and a message will be

displayed to warn the driver, and

the vehicle will slowly deceler-

ate. If driving operations, such

as holding the steering wheel,

are not performed within a cer-

tain amount of time, the system

will determine that the driver is

not responsive and enter the

deceleration stop phase.

After shifting to the deceleration

stop phase, the following functions

will not be available until the engine

is re-started even though the emer-

gency driving stop system is can-

celed:

●LTA

When the vehicle is decelerating,

the brake lights may illuminate,

depending on the road conditions,

etc.

4

Deceleration stop phase

After entering the deceleration

stop phase, a buzzer will sound

continuously and a message will

be displayed to warn the driver,

and the vehicle will slowly decel-

erate and stop. After the vehicle

stops, the system will enter the

stop and hold phase.

Stop hold phase

After the vehicle is stopped, the

parking brake will be applied

automatically. After entering the

stop and hold phase, the buzzer

will continue sounding continu-

ously and the emergency flash-

ers (hazard lights) will flash to

warn other drivers of the emer-

308

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Function

Status

TDA (Trailer Driving

*

Assist)

PDA (Proactive

driving assist)

(P.281)



*

: If equipped

TDA (Trailer Driving Assist)

is a system that adjusts cer-

tain driver assist settings to

support towing functional-

ity. It is recommended to

use a genuine Toyota Trailer

Brake Controller (TBC)

(P.437) (if equipped) when

towing.

RSA (Road Sign

*2

O

Assist)

(P.288)

Dynamic radar

cruise control

(P.290)

Emergency Driv-

ing Stop System

(P.305)



Towing without a genuine

Toyota Trailer Brake Con-

troller (TBC) (if equipped)

increases the risk of vehi-

cle/trailer instability.

Intuitive parking

*2

*1

assist

(P.323)

PKSB (Parking

*2



Support Brake)

(P.339)

System functions

Parking Support

Brake function

*2

When the TDA (Trailer Driving

Assist) is operating, each func-

tion is limited as follows:

(static objects)

(P.344)

RCD (Rear Cam-

*2

Function

Status



era Detection)

(P.335)

AHB (Automatic

High Beam)

(P.238)

O

RCTA (Rear

Cross Traffic

Alert) (P.330)

PCS (Pre-Colli-

sion System)

(P.259)

*1

Definition of symbols: O = Avail-

able, — = Not available

*1

LTA (Lane Trac-

ing Assist)

:Partially unavailable



*2

(P.270)

:If equipped

LDA (Lane

Departure Alert)

(P.275)

■Operating conditions

O

Operates when any of the following

conditions are met:

309

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●When towing a trailer connected

*

Stop & Start system

to a genuine Toyota Trailer Brake

Controller (TBC) (P.437) (if

equipped)

*

: If equipped

●When BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

(P.316) detects a connected

trailer

The Stop & Start system

stops and starts the engine

according to brake pedal or

shift lever operation when

the vehicle is stopped, such

as at a stoplight, intersec-

tion, etc., in order to

improve fuel economy and

reduce noise pollution

caused by the engine idling.

A message is displayed on the

multi-information display when a

trailer is detected.

Enable the function according to the

instructions on the multi-information

display.

■PCS (Pre-Collision System)

function

The following functions are dis-

abled when a trailer is detected.

Stop & Start system oper-

ation

4

• Moderate braking for pre-collision

warning

• Acceleration suppression at low

speed

■ Stopping the engine

• Emergency steering assist

While driving with the D shift

position selected, depress the

brake pedal and stop the vehi-

cle. The engine will stop auto-

matically.

• Intersection collision avoidance

support (left/right turn)

■When towing a trailer

●This system has limitations. Do

not overly rely on the system. It is

the driver’s responsibility to

always be aware of the surround-

ings and drive safely.

When the engine stops, the Stop &

Start indicator will illuminate.

●Please check P.205 on how to tow

a trailer properly.

WARNING

■For safe use

If the vehicle is being driven on a

slippery surface such as an icy

road or a very wet road, disable

the system, as it may not operate

properly, possibly leading to an

accident resulting in death or seri-

ous injury.

■ Restarting the engine

Release the brake pedal. The

engine will start automatically.

When the engine starts, the Stop &

Start indicator will turn off.

310

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ When the brake hold sys-

tem is operating

the vehicle will remain

stopped.

 When the engine is stopped

by the Stop & Start system, if

the brake pedal is released

the engine will remain

Disabling the Stop & Start

system

Press the Stop & Start cancel

switch to disable the Stop &

Start system.

stopped.

However, when a vehicle

stops forward or a person

walks the front and so on, the

engine may be restarted.

The Stop & Start cancel indica-

tor will illuminate.

Pressing the switch again will

enable the Stop & Start system and

the Stop & Start cancel indicator will

turn off.

 If the accelerator pedal is

depressed while the engine is

stopped by the Stop & Start

system, the engine will

restart.

 While the engine is stopped

by the Stop & Start system, if

the engine is restarted, the

brake hold system will con-

tinue to apply the brakes,

unless the operation condi-

tions of the brake hold system

are no longer met. (P.231)

■Automatic enabling of the Stop

& Start system

■ When the dynamic radar

cruise control is operating

If the Stop & Start system is dis-

abled using the Stop & Start cancel

switch, it will be automatically re-

enabled once the engine switch is

turned off and then the engine is

started.

 When the vehicle is stopped

by the dynamic radar cruise

control, the engine will stop

automatically even though the

brake pedal is not depressed.

Hill-start assist control

 When the preceding vehicle

starts off, the engine will

restart automatically.

When the engine is stopped by

the Stop & Start system when

the vehicle is on an incline,

when the brake pedal is

 If the engine is restarted by

the Stop & Start system while

the vehicle is stopped by the

dynamic radar cruise control,

released, brake force is tempo-

rarily maintained to prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards

311

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Operating conditions

before the engine is restarted

and drive force is generated.

When drive force is generated,

the maintained brake force is

automatically canceled.

●The Stop & Start system is opera-

tional when all of the following

conditions are met:

• The vehicle has been driven a cer-

tain amount of time.

• The brake pedal is being

depressed firmly. (Except when

the vehicle is stopped by the

dynamic radar cruise control when

in vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode)

• The D shift position is selected.

• The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

• The driver’s door is closed.

• The selected driving mode is not

“4H” or “4L” mode. (part-time 4WD

models)

 This function operates on flat

surfaces as well as steep

inclines.

 Sound may be generated

from the brake system, but

this does not indicate a mal-

function.

 Brake pedal response may

change and vibration may

occur, but this does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

• The selected driving mode is not

“H4F” or “L4L” mode. (full-time

4WD models)

• The Multi-terrain Select is not

operated (if equipped)

4

• The selected driving mode is not

rear differential lock mode. (if

equipped)

• The windshield defogger is off.

• The accelerator pedal is not being

depressed.

■Points for use

●If the engine switch is pressed

when the engine is stopped by the

Stop & Start system, the engine

will not be able to be restarted by

the automatic engine start func-

tion. In this case, restart the

• The engine is adequately warmed

up.

• The hood is closed. (P.312)

• “TOW HAUL” mode is not oper-

ated (if equipped)

engine using the normal engine

starting procedure. (P.218)

●When the engine is being

●In the following situations the

engine may not be stopped by the

Stop & Start system. This is not a

malfunction of the Stop & Start

system.

• When the air conditioning system

is being used.

• When the battery is undergoing a

periodic recharge.

• When the battery is not sufficiently

charged, such as if the vehicle

has been parked for a long time

and the battery charge has

decreased, the electric load is

large, the battery fluid tempera-

ture is excessively low or the bat-

tery has deteriorated.

restarted by the Stop & Start sys-

tem, the power outlets may be

temporarily unusable, but this

does not indicate a malfunction.

●Installation and removal of electri-

cal components and wireless

devices may affect the Stop &

Start system. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

●When stopping the vehicle for a

longer period of time, turn the

engine switch off to stop the

engine completely.

●When the engine is restarted by

the Stop & Start system, the steer-

ing wheel may temporarily feel

heavy.

• When the brake booster vacuum

is low.

312

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When the elapsed time since the

engine was restarted is short.

• When the vehicle is stopped fre-

quently, such as when in a traffic

jam.

• When the engine coolant tem-

perature or transmission fluid tem-

perature is extremely low or high.

• When the vehicle is stopped on a

steep incline.

●When the engine is stopped by

the Stop & Start system, the

engine may restart automatically

in the following situations: (To

enable the engine to be stopped

by the Stop & Start system again,

drive the vehicle.)

• When the brake pedal is pumped

or strongly depressed.

• When the air conditioning system

is being used.

• When the vehicle is being driven

in a high altitude area.

• When a switch of the air condition-

ing system is operated (windshield

defogger switch, etc.).

• When the battery fluid tempera-

ture is extremely low or high.

• For a while after the battery termi-

nals have been disconnected and

reconnected.

• If the battery charge becomes low.

■When the hood is opened

●If the hood is opened while the

engine is stopped by the Stop &

Start system, the engine will stall

and will not be able to be restarted

by the automatic engine start

function. In this case, restart the

engine using the normal engine

starting procedure. (P.218)

●If the hood is closed after the

engine is started with the hood

open, the Stop & Start system will

not operate. Close the hood, turn

the engine switch off, wait 30 sec-

onds or more, and then start the

engine.

●When the engine is stopped by

the Stop & Start system, the

engine will be restarted automati-

cally if any of the following condi-

tions are met:

(To enable the engine to be

stopped by the Stop & Start sys-

tem again, drive the vehicle.)

• The air conditioning system is

being used. (vehicles without a

manual air conditioning system)

• The windshield defogger is turned

on. (vehicles without a manual air

conditioning system)

• The shift lever is shifted from D.

• The driver’s seat belt is unfas-

tened.

• The driver’s door is opened.

• The selected driving mode is “4H”

or “4L” mode. (part-time 4WD

models)

■Air conditioning system opera-

tion while the engine is stopped

by the Stop & Start system

Vehicles with an automatic air con-

ditioning system: When the air con-

ditioning is in automatic mode and

the engine is stopped by the Stop &

Start system, the fan may operate at

a low speed in order to prevent the

temperature in the cabin from

increasing or decreasing or may be

stopped.

• The selected driving mode is

“H4F” or “L4L” mode. (full-time

4WD models)

• The Multi-terrain Select is oper-

ated (if equipped)

• “TOW HAUL” mode is operated (if

equipped)

• The driving mode is changed to

rear differential lock mode. (if

equipped)

• The Stop & Start cancel switch is

pressed.

To prioritize air conditioning system

performance when the vehicle is

stopped, disable the Stop & Start

system by pressing the Stop & Start

cancel switch.

• The accelerator pedal is

depressed.

●If the windshield is fogged up

• The vehicle starts to roll on an

incline.

Turn the windshield defogger on.

313

4-5. Using the driving support systems

(P.462)

“Press Brake More to Acti-

If the windshield fogs up frequently,

press the Stop & Start cancel switch

to disable the Stop & Start system.

vate”

• The brake pedal is not sufficiently

depressed.

 If the brake pedal is depressed

further, the system will operate.

●If an odor is emitted from the air

conditioning system

• Vehicles with a manual air condi-

tioning system

“Non-Dedicated Battery”

• A battery not designed for use

with a Stop & Start system may

have been installed.

If the idling stop time setting is set to

“Extended” change it to “Standard”.

If an odor is emitted when the idling

stop time setting is set to “Stan-

dard”, press the Stop & Start cancel

switch to deactivate the Stop & Start

system.

 Have the vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

“Battery Charging”

• The battery charge may be low.

 Stopping of the engine is tempo-

rarily prohibited to prioritize charging

of the battery. After the engine runs

for a certain amount of time, the sys-

tem will be enabled.

• Vehicles with an automatic air

conditioning system

4

Press the Stop & Start cancel switch

to deactivate the Stop & Start sys-

tem.

• A refresh charge may be occur-

ring

■Changing the idling stop time

with the air conditioning system

on

After a refresh charge for up to an

hour completes, the system can be

operated.

• If displayed continuously for a

long time (more than an hour)

The length of time the Stop & Start

system will operate when the air

conditioning system is on can be

changed in

of the multi-informa-

 The battery may be deteriorated.

Contact your Toyota dealer for

details.

tion display (P.649). (The length of

time the Stop & Start system will

operate when the air conditioning

system is off cannot be changed.)

“Stop & Start System

Unavailable”

■Displaying the Stop & Start sys-

tem status

• The Stop & Start system is tempo-

rarily disabled.

P.310

■Multi-information display mes-

sages

 Allow the engine to run for some

time.

• The engine may have been

started with the hood open.

 Close the hood, turn the engine

switch off, wait for 30 seconds or

more, and then start the engine.

If the following situations,

and a message may be displayed

on the multi-information display.

“In Preparation”

●When the engine cannot be

stopped by the Stop & Start sys-

tem

• The vehicle is being driven in a

high altitude area.

• The brake booster vacuum is low.

314

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 When the brake booster vacuum

reaches a predetermined level, the

system will be enabled.

suddenly be cut off in order to

reduce battery consumption. To

prevent the audio system from

being cut off, keep the volume of

audio system at a moderate level.

If the audio system has been cut

off, turn the engine switch off, wait

for 3 seconds or more and then

turn it to ACC or ON to re-enable

the audio system.

“For Climate Control”

• The air conditioning system is

being used when the ambient

temperature is high or low.

If the difference between the set

temperature and cabin temperature

becomes small, the system will be

enabled.

●The audio system may not be acti-

vated if the battery terminals are

disconnected and then recon-

nected. If this occurs, turn the

engine switch off and then repeat

the following operation twice to

activate the audio system nor-

mally.

• The windshield defogger is on.

●When the engine automatically

restarts while stopped by the Stop

& Start system

“In Preparation”

• The brake pedal has been

depressed further or pumped.

• Turn the engine switch to ON and

then to off.

■Replacing the battery

P.610

 The system will be enabled after

the engine runs and the brake

booster vacuum reaches a predeter-

mined level.

■If the Stop & Start cancel indica-

tor flashes continuously

The system may be malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

“For Climate Control”

• The air conditioning system has

being used.

• The windshield defogger has

been turned on.

■If “Stop & Start System Mal-

function Visit Your Dealer” is

displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display

“Battery Charging”

• The battery charge may be low.

The system may be malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

The system will be enabled after

the engine runs to sufficiently

charge the battery.

WARNING

■When the buzzer sounds

■When the Stop & Start system

If the driver’s door is opened when

the engine is stopped by the Stop &

Start system and the shift lever is in

D, a buzzer will sound and the Stop

& Start system indicator will flash. To

stop the buzzer, close the driver’s

door.

is operating

Make sure to disable the Stop &

Start system while the vehicle is in

a poorly ventilated area.

If not disabled, the engine may be

automatically restarted unexpect-

edly, causing exhaust gases to

collect and enter the vehicle, pos-

sibly resulting in death or a seri-

ous health hazard.

■The Stop & Start system protec-

tion function

●When the volume of the audio

system is excessively high, sound

output from the audio system may

315

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●Do not leave the vehicle while

BSM (Blind Spot Moni-

tor)

the engine is stopped by the

Stop & Start system (while the

Stop & Start indicator is on). An

accident may occur due to the

automatic engine start function.

The Blind Spot Monitor is a

system that uses rear side

radar sensors installed on

the inner side of the rear

bumper on the left and right

side to assist the driver in

confirming safety when

changing lanes.

●Depress the brake pedal and

apply the parking brake when

necessary while the engine is

stopped by the Stop & Start sys-

tem (while the Stop & Start indi-

cator is on).

NOTICE

WARNING

■To ensure the system oper-

ates correctly

■Cautions regarding the use of

the system

If any of the following situations

occur, the Stop & Start system

may not operate correctly. Have

your vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

4

●The driver is solely responsible

for safe driving. Always drive

safely, taking care to observe

your surroundings.

●While the driver’s seat belt is

fastened, the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat belt reminder

light flashes.

●The Blind Spot Monitor is a sup-

plementary function which alerts

the driver that a vehicle is in a

blind spot of the outside rear

view mirrors or is approaching

rapidly from behind into a blind

spot. Do not overly rely on the

Blind Spot Monitor. As the func-

tion cannot judge if it is safe to

change lanes, over reliance

could lead to an accident result-

ing in death or serious injury. As

the system may not function

correctly under certain condi-

tions, the driver’s own visual

confirmation of safety is neces-

sary.

●Even though the driver’s seat

belt is not fastened, the driver’s

and front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light does not illumi-

nate.

●Even though the driver’s door is

closed, the open door warning

light is illuminated or the interior

light is illuminated when the

interior light switch is in the door

position.

●Even though the driver’s door is

open, the open door warning

light does not illuminate or the

interior light does not illuminate

when the interior light switch is

in the door position.

316

System components

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Certification

P.696

WARNING

■To ensure the system can

operate properly

Blind Spot Monitor sensors are

installed behind the left and right

sides of the rear bumper respec-

tively. Observe the following to

ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can

operate correctly.

Meter control switches

●Keep the sensors and the sur-

rounding areas on the rear

bumper clean at all times.

Turning the Blind Spot Monitor

on/off.

If a sensor or its surrounding area

on the rear bumper is dirty or cov-

ered with snow, the Blind Spot

Monitor may not operate and a

warning message will be dis-

played. In this situation, clear off

the dirt or snow and drive the

vehicle with the operation condi-

tions of the BSM function

(P.321) satisfied for approxi-

mately 10 minutes. If the warning

message does not disappear,

have the vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

Outside rear view mirror indi-

cators

When a vehicle is detected in a

blind spot of the outside rear view

mirrors or approaching rapidly from

behind into a blind spot, the outside

rear view mirror indicator (P.78)

on the detected side will illuminate.

If the turn signal lever is operated

toward the detected side, the out-

side rear view mirror indicator

flashes.

Driving assist information

indicator

Illuminates when the Blind Spot

Monitor is turned off. At this time, a

message will be displayed on the

multi-information display.

■Outside rear view mirror indica-

tor visibility

●Do not attach accessories,

stickers (including transparent

stickers), aluminum tape, etc.,

to a sensor or its surrounding

area on the rear bumper.

In strong sunlight, the outside rear

view mirror indicator may be difficult

to see.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(P.649)

317

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Setting the trailer type

●Do not subject a sensor or its

surrounding area on the rear

bumper to a strong impact.

If a sensor is moved even

slightly off position, the system

may malfunction and vehicles

may not be detected correctly.

In the following situations, have

your vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

Select “Trailer Settings” on the

multi-information display and

add a trailer according to the

display. (P.96, 105)

■ Auto Trailer Detection (ATD)

Auto Trailer Detection (ATD)

detects if a trailer is attached by

using the Trailer Brake Control-

ler (TBC) (if equipped) or the

Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) sen-

sors.

• A sensor or its surrounding area

is subject to a strong impact.

• If the surrounding area of a sen-

sor is scratched or dented, or

part of them has become dis-

connected.

 Trailers that use TBC can be

detected by using the 7-pin

trailer connector. (vehicles

with the Trailer Brake Control-

ler)

●Do not disassemble the sensor.

4

●Do not modify the sensor or sur-

rounding area on the rear

bumper.

●If a sensor or the rear bumper

needs to be removed/installed

or replaced, contact your Toyota

dealer.

 Other types of trailers can be

detected using the BSM sen-

sors.

●Do not paint the rear bumper

any color other than an official

Toyota color.

 When a trailer is detected via

the 7-pin trailer connectors

(vehicles equipped with the

Trailer Brake Controller) or via

the BSM, and “Yes” has been

selected on the pop-up dis-

play on the meter to confirm a

trailer is detected, the follow-

ing modes will change as fol-

lows:

Turning the Blind Spot

Monitor on/off

The Blind Spot Monitor can be

enabled/disabled through a cus-

tomize setting. (P.637)

When the Blind Spot Monitor is

off, the driving assist information

indicator (P.78) will illuminate

and a message will be displayed

on the multi-information display.

• RCTA, PKSB (if equipped), RCD

(if equipped), and the rear sen-

sors of intuitive parking assist will

be disabled.

• The detection area of BSM will be

expanded to a maximum length

of approximately 50 ft. (15 m)

from the vehicle’s rear bumper.

Each time the engine switch is

turned to ON, the Blind Spot

Monitor is enabled.

318

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 For trailer auto detection with-

out engagement of 7-pin

trailer connector (vehicles

with the Trailer Brake Control-

ler), the vehicle should be

moving forward at speed of

above 6 mph (10 km/h) for at

least 10 seconds.

 ATD function is triggered at

every engine switch on/off

cycle, the vehicle is stopped

and the shift lever is in P or N,

or the parking brake is set for

more than 90 seconds

 When a trailer no longer

detected via the BSM, after

disconnecting the trailer from

the vehicle, and “Yes” has

been selected on the pop-up

display on the meter to con-

firm the trailer no longer

detected, the previously dis-

abled systems will be enabled

and the detection area of the

BSM will return to the previ-

ous settings.

 Trailer detection via BSM sen-

sors may be delayed if the

vehicle is in a crowded envi-

ronment such as busy parking

lot, area surrounded with

trees (camping ground) or in

an environment with objects

in the immediate environment

that prevent sensors from suf-

ficiently detecting the trailer.

319

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Trailer Length Detection

(TLD)

■ Trailer Merge Warning

(TMW)

 Once a trailer is detected and

if the trailer length in the

 When towing a trailer, the

blind spot system uses input

from ATD and TLD to modify

the detection zone to match

the trailer. TMW will alert via

the indicators of the outside

mirror when a vehicle in an

adjacent lane enters the mod-

ified detection zone.

meter is selected as “Auto”,

the TLD function will estimate

the trailer length using the

Blind Spot Monitor sensors

In order to estimate the trailer

length with TLD function and detec-

tion area, make at least two 90

degree turns.

 Depending on some combina-

tions of trailer types, trailer

dimensions, and bumper

types TMW performance may

be degraded.

If the trailer length is entered manu-

ally via multi-information display

input, the detection area is also

adjusted to exceed the length of the

trailer.

4

Blind Spot Monitor operation

■ Objects that can be detected while driving

The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the fol-

lowing vehicles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of

the presence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear

view mirrors.

 When not towing a trailer

Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the

outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that

are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

320

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 When towing a trailer

Vehicles approaching in adjacent lanes that may not be visible

using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

■ Detection range while driving

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

 When not towing a trailer

The range of each detection area is:

Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of

the vehicle^*1

Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear

bumper^*2

321

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 When towing a trailer

The range of each detection area is:

Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of

the vehicle^*1

Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

Trailer overall length^*3

4

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear end of trailer^*3

*1

*2

:The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side

of the vehicle cannot be detected.

:The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the

detected vehicle is, the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing

the outside rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash.

*3

:The system is designed to support utility and boat trailers up to 8.5 ft.

(2.59 m) wide, most enclosed type trailer types up to 8 ft. (2.46 m) wide,

and trailers no longer than 39 ft. (12.0 m). For wider trailers and/or trail-

ers with shorter tongues lengths the indicator warning in the outer mirror

may be delayed.

■ The Blind Spot Monitor linked function

The LDA (Lane Departure Alert) has a function that uses information

of detected vehicles driving in an adjacent lane. For details about the

function and its operating conditions, P.275.

other than R.

■The Blind Spot Monitor is oper-

●The vehicle speed is approxi-

ational when

mately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

The Blind Spot Monitor is opera-

tional when all of the following con-

ditions are met:

■The Blind Spot Monitor will

detect a vehicle when

The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a

vehicle present in the detection area

in the following situations:

●The engine switch is in ON.

●The Blind Spot Monitor is on.

●The shift lever is in a position

322

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●A vehicle in an adjacent lane over- • When the distance between your

takes your vehicle.

vehicle and a following vehicle is

short

• When there is a significant differ-

ence in speed between your vehi-

cle and the vehicle that enters the

detection area

●You overtake a vehicle in an adja-

cent lane slowly.

●Another vehicle enters the detec-

tion area when it changes lanes.

• When the difference in speed

between your vehicle and another

vehicle is changing

• When a vehicle enters a detection

area traveling at about the same

speed as your vehicle

• As your vehicle starts from a stop,

a vehicle remains in the detection

area

• When driving up and down con-

secutive steep inclines, such as

hills, dips in the road, etc.

• When driving on roads with sharp

bends, consecutive curves, or

uneven surfaces

• When vehicle lanes are wide, or

when driving on the edge of a

lane, and the vehicle in an adja-

cent lane is far away from your

vehicle

• When an accessory (such as a

bicycle carrier) is installed to the

rear of the vehicle

• When there is a significant differ-

ence in height between your vehi-

cle and the vehicle that enters the

detection area

• Immediately after the Blind Spot

Monitor is turned on

■Situations in which the Blind

Spot Monitor cannot detect

vehicles.

The Blind Spot Monitor cannot

detect the following vehicles and

other objects:

●Small motorcycles, bicycles,

*

pedestrians, etc.

●Vehicles traveling in the opposite

direction

●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked

vehicles and similar stationary

*

objects

●Following vehicles that are in the

*

same lane

●Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away

*

from your vehicle

●Vehicles which are being over-

*

taken rapidly by your vehicle

*

: Depending on the conditions,

detection of a vehicle and/or

object may occur.

■Conditions under which the

system may not function cor-

rectly

●Instances of the Blind Spot Moni-

tor unnecessarily detecting a vehi-

cle and/or object may increase in

the following situations:

• When the sensor is misaligned

due to a strong impact to the sen-

sor or its surrounding area

• When the distance between your

vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.,

that enters the detection area is

short

• When driving up and down con-

secutive steep inclines, such as

hills, dips in the road, etc.

●The Blind Spot Monitor may not

detect vehicles correctly in the fol-

lowing situations:

• When the sensor is misaligned

due to a strong impact to the sen-

sor or its surrounding area

• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,

etc., is covering the sensor or sur-

rounding area on the rear bumper

• When driving on a wet road sur-

face, such as in a puddle, while in

inclement weather, such as heavy

rain, snow, fog, etc.

• When multiple vehicles are

approaching with only a small gap

between each vehicle

• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or

when driving on the edge of a

lane, and a vehicle traveling in a

lane other than the adjacent lanes

323

4-5. Using the driving support systems

enters the detection area

Intuitive parking

*

• When driving on roads with sharp

bends, consecutive curves, or

uneven surfaces

assist

• When the tires are slipping or

spinning

*

: If equipped

• When the distance between your

vehicle and a following vehicle is

short

• When an accessory (such as a

bicycle carrier) is installed to the

rear of the vehicle

• When turning at an intersection

with a trailer is being towed and

an adjacent vehicle continues

traveling straight

The intuitive parking assist

function detects the approx-

imate distance from the

vehicle and an object such

as a wall using ultrasonic

sensors and informs the

driver with the multimedia

display distance display

and buzzer.

System components

4

■ Type of sensors

Front corner sensors

Front center sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

■ Display

When the sensors detect an

object, such as a wall, a graphic

is shown on the multimedia dis-

play depending on the position

and distance to the object.

Vehicles without multimedia dis-

324

4-5. Using the driving support systems

play or rear camera: When

engine switch has been turned

off.)

detecting a stationary object, the

intuitive parking assist detection

indicator illuminates. (P.78)

Vehicles without the multimedia

display or rear camera: How-

ever, the system will automati-

cally turn on (enabled) and the

intuitive parking assist OFF indi-

cator will turn off if the shift posi-

tion is changed to R.

The illustration is an example for

explanation and may differ

depending on the specifications.

 Multimedia display

When the shift position is R, the

intuitive parking assist cannot

be turned on or off.

The setting of intuitive parking

assist itself will not change.

■When towing a trailer

●When Auto Trailer Detection

(ATD) (P.318) is activated, rear

sensor turns off.

Turning the intuitive park-

ing assist function

ON/OFF

●When the shift position is in R, the

intuitive parking assist OFF indica-

tor (P.78) turns on and a mes-

sage is displayed in the multi-

information display.

The intuitive parking assist func-

tion can be enabled/disabled

through a customize setting.

(P.637)

●If a camera malfunction occurs

while the trailer is connected,

There may be cases where the

notification message that indi-

cates Intuitive Parking Assist,

RCD (if equipped), or PKSB is

OFF may not be displayed.

When the intuitive parking assist

function is disabled, the intuitive

parking assist OFF indicator

(P.78) illuminates on the multi-

information display.

If the system switches to OFF

(disabled) and the intuitive park-

ing assist is stopped, the intui-

tive parking assist will not be re-

enabled until ON (enabled) is

selected again from the custom-

ize setting (P.637). (It remains

off even if the engine switch is

turned to ON again after the

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of

the system

There is a limit to the degree of

recognition accuracy and control

performance that this system can

provide, do not overly rely on this

system. The driver is always

responsible for paying attention to

the vehicle’s surroundings and

driving safely.

325

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●When using steam to clean the

vehicle, do not direct steam too

close to the sensors, as doing

so may cause a sensor to mal-

function.

WARNING

■To ensure the system can

operate properly

Make sure to observe the follow-

ing precautions. The system may

not operate properly and may

lead to an unexpected accident.

When these precautions cannot

be observed, turn the system off.

■The system can be operated

when

●The engine switch is in ON.

●Do not damage the sensors,

●The intuitive parking assist is on.

and always keep them clean.

●The vehicle speed is less than

about 6 mph (10 km/h).

●Do not attach a sticker or install

a component, such as a backlit

license plate (especially fluores-

cent type), fog lights, fender

pole or wireless antenna near a

radar sensor.

●Front corner sensors:

The shift position is in a position

other than P.

●Front center sensors:

4

The shift position is in a position

other than P or R.

●Do not subject the surrounding

area of the sensor to a strong

impact. If subjected to an

impact, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota

dealer. If the front or rear

bumper needs to be

●Rear corner and rear center sen-

sors:

The shift position is in R.

Vehicles without the multimedia dis-

play or rear camera: The system will

automatically turn on (enabled) and

the intuitive parking assist OFF indi-

cator will turn off if the shift position

is changed to R.

removed/installed or replaced,

contact your Toyota dealer.

●Do not modify, disassemble or

paint the sensors.

●Do not attach a license plate

cover.

The setting of intuitive parking assist

itself will not change.

●Keep your tires properly

■Sensor detection information

inflated.

●The sensor’s detection areas are

limited to the areas around the

vehicle’s front and rear bumpers.

●Do not install a suspension

other than a genuine suspen-

sion.

●Certain vehicle conditions and the

surrounding environment may

affect the ability of a sensor to cor-

rectly detect an object.

■Notes when washing the vehi-

cle

●When using a high pressure

washer to wash the vehicle, do

not spray the sensors directly,

as doing so may cause a sensor

to malfunction.

●Objects may not be detected if

they are too close to the sensor.

●There will be a short delay

between object detection and dis-

play.

Even at low speeds, there is a pos-

sibility that the object will come

326

4-5. Using the driving support systems

within the sensor’s detection areas

before the display is shown and the

warning beep sounds.

●When a sensor or the area around

a sensor is extremely hot or cold.

●It might be difficult to hear the

buzzer due to the volume of the

audio system or air flow noise of

the air conditioning system.

●It may be difficult to hear the

sound of this system due to the

buzzers of other systems.

●On an extremely bumpy road, on

an incline, on gravel, or on grass.

●If the meter malfunctions, the

buzzer may not sound.

●When vehicle horns, vehicle

detectors, motorcycle engines, air

brakes of large vehicles, the clear-

ance sonar of other vehicles or

other devices which produce ultra-

sonic waves are near the vehicle

■Objects which the system may

not be properly detected

The shape of the object may pre-

vent the sensor from detecting it.

Pay particular attention to the follow-

ing objects:

●A sensor is coated with a sheet of

spray or heavy rain.

●Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

●Cotton, snow and other materials

that absorb sound waves

●If objects draw too close to the

sensor.

●Sharply-angled objects

●Low objects

●When a pedestrian is wearing

clothing that does not reflect ultra-

sonic waves (ex. skirts with gath-

ers or frills).

●Tall objects with upper sections

projecting outwards in the direc-

tion of your vehicle

●When objects that are not perpen-

dicular to the ground, not perpen-

dicular to the vehicle traveling

direction, uneven, or waving are in

the detection range.

People may not be detected if they

are wearing certain types of cloth-

ing.

●When strong winds are blowing

■Situations in which the system

may not operate properly

●When driving in inclement weather

such as fog, snow or a sandstorm

Certain vehicle conditions and the

surrounding environment may affect

the ability of a sensor to correctly

detect objects. Particular instances

where this may occur are listed

below.

●When an object that cannot be

detected is between the vehicle

and a detected object

●If an object such as a vehicle,

motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian

cuts in front of the vehicle or runs

out from the side of the vehicle

●There is dirt, snow, water drops or

ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the

sensors will resolve this problem.)

●If the orientation of a sensor has

been changed due to a collision or

other impact

●A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the

area will resolve this problem.)

In especially cold weather, if a

sensor is frozen the sensor dis-

play may be displayed abnormally,

or objects, such as a wall, may not

be detected.

●When equipment such as a towing

eyelet, transport hook, bumper

protector, bumper trim, bicycle

carrier or snow-removal device

327

4-5. Using the driving support systems

(snow plow) is installed near the spray or heavy rain

sensor

●When driving in inclement weather

●If the front of the vehicle is raised

or lowered due to the carried load

such as fog, snow or a sandstorm

●When strong winds are blowing

●If the vehicle cannot be driven in a

stable manner, such as when the

vehicle has been in an accident or

is malfunctioning

●When tire chains, compact spare

tire or an emergency tire puncture

repair kit are used

●When towing with the vehicle

■Situations in which the system

may operate even if there is no

possibility of a collision

●When vehicle horns, vehicle

detectors, motorcycle engines, air

brakes of large vehicles, the clear-

ance sonar of other vehicles or

other devices which produce ultra-

sonic waves are near the vehicle

In some situations, such as the fol-

lowing, the system may operate

even though there is no possibility of

a collision.

4

●If the front of the vehicle is raised

or lowered due to the carried load

●When driving on a narrow road

●If the orientation of a sensor has

been changed due to a collision or

other impact

●The vehicle is approaching a tall

or curved curb

●Driving close to columns (H-

shaped steel beams, etc.) in multi-

story parking garages, construc-

tion sites, etc.

●When driving toward a banner,

flag, low-hanging branch or boom

barrier (such as those used at rail-

road crossings, toll gates and

parking lots)

●If the vehicle cannot be driven in a

stable manner, such as when the

vehicle has been in an accident or

is malfunctioning

●On an extremely bumpy road, on

an incline, on gravel, or on grass

●When there is a rut or hole in the

surface of the road

●When driving on a metal cover

(grating), such as those used for

drainage ditches

●When driving up or down a steep

slope

●If a sensor is hit by a large amount

of water, such as when driving on

a flooded road

●When tire chains, compact spare

tire or an emergency tire puncture

repair kit are used

●There is dirt, snow, water drops or

ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the

sensors will resolve this problem.)

●When towing with the vehicle

●A sensor is coated with a sheet of

328

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■When towing a trailer

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100

cm)

Rear sensors turn off when the

trailer connection is detected.

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150

cm)

When reversing, the rear sensors

turn off, but the front corner sensors

operate.

Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

■Certification

P.698

The diagram shows the detection

range of the sensors.

Note that the sensors cannot detect

objects that are extremely close to

the vehicle.

Sensor detection display,

object distance

The range of the sensors may

change depending on the shape of

the object, etc.

■ Detection range of the sen-

sors

■ The distance and buzzer

Approximate distance to obstacle

Buzzer

Front center sensor:

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.0

*

ft. (60 cm)

Slow

Rear center sensor:

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0

*

ft. (60 cm)

Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5

*

Medium

ft. (45 cm)

329

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Approximate distance to obstacle Buzzer

Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0

*

Fast

ft. (30 cm)

Approximately less than 1.0 ft. (30

cm)

Continuous

*

: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (P.329)

■Muting a buzzer

Intuitive parking assist

buzzer

When the temporary mute switch is

displayed on the multimedia display,

this switch can be pressed to tem-

porarily mute the buzzer.

A buzzer sounds when the sen-

sors are operating.

Select the switch to mute a buzzer

of the intuitive parking assist, RCTA,

and RCD (if equipped) all together.

 The buzzer beeps faster as

the vehicle approaches a

static object. When the vehi-

cle comes within the approxi-

mately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) of the

object, the buzzer will sound

continuously.

●Mute will be automatically can-

celed in the following situations:

• When the shift position is

changed.

• When the vehicle speed exceeds

a certain speed.

• When there is a malfunction in a

sensor or the system is temporar-

ily unavailable.

• When the operating function is

disabled manually.

4

 When 2 or more sensors

simultaneously detect a static

object, the buzzer sounds for

the nearest object.

• When the engine switch is turned

off.

 After an intermittent buzzer

begins sounding, if the dis-

tance between the vehicle

and the detected static object

does not become shorter, the

buzzer will be muted automat-

ically. (automatic buzzer mute

function)

■Adjusting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume of the intuitive

parking assist, RCTA, and RCD (if

equipped) can all be changed at

once from the customize settings.

(P.637)

330

4-5. Using the driving support systems

RCTA (Rear Cross Traf-

fic Alert) function

System components

The RCTA function uses the

BSM rear side radar sen-

sors installed behind the

rear bumper. This function

is intended to assist the

driver in checking areas

that are not easily visible

when backing up.

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of

the system

Meter control switches

The driver is solely responsible for

safe driving. Always drive safely,

taking care to observe your sur-

roundings.

The RCTA function is only a sup-

plementary function which alerts

the driver that a vehicle is

approaching from the right or left

at the rear of the vehicle.

As the RCTA function may not

function correctly under certain

conditions, the driver’s own visual

confirmation of safety is neces-

sary.

Over reliance on this function may

lead to an accident resulting

death or serious injury.

Operate the meter control switches

to enable/disable the RCTA func-

tion on the multi-information dis-

play.

Outside rear view mirror indi-

cators

If a vehicle is detected as

approaching from the left or right

behind the vehicle, both outside

rear view mirror indicators (P.78)

will blink and a buzzer will sound.

Multimedia display

If a vehicle approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle

is detected, the RCTA icon

■To ensure the system can

operate properly

P.317

(P.331) for the detected side will

be displayed on the multimedia dis-

*

play. This illustration shows an

example of a vehicle approaching

from both sides of the vehicle.

*

: Depending on the vehicle grade

and equipped options, the actual

screen may be different from this

illustration.

331

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving assist information

RCTA function

indicator

■ Operation of the RCTA

function

Illuminates when the RCTA is

turned off. At this time, a message

will be displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display.

The RCTA function uses rear

side radar sensors to detect

vehicles approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the

vehicle and alerts the driver of

the presence of such vehicles

by flashing the outside rear view

mirror indicators and sounding a

buzzer.

Turning the RCTA func-

tion on/off

The RCTA can be enabled/dis-

abled through a customize set-

ting. (P.637)

When the RCTA function is off,

the driving assist information

indicator (P.78) will illuminate

and a message will be displayed

on the multi-information display.

Each time the engine switch is

turned to ON, the RCTA function

is enabled.

4

■When towing a trailer

Approaching vehicles

When Auto Trailer Detection (ATD)

(P.318) is activated, the function

turns off.

Detection areas of approach-

ing vehicles

■Outside rear view mirror indica-

tor visibility

■ RCTA icon display

When a vehicle approaching

from the right or left at the rear

of the vehicle is detected, the

following will be displayed on

the multimedia display.

In strong sunlight, the outside rear

view mirror indicator may be difficult

to see.

■Hearing the RCTA buzzer

The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to

hear over loud noises, such as if the

audio system volume is high.

Example: Vehicles are

approaching from both sides of

the vehicle

■Rear side radar sensors

P.317

332

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●The RCTA function is on.

●The shift position is in R.

●The vehicle speed is less than

approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).

●The approaching vehicle speed is

between approximately 5 mph (8

km/h) and 34 mph (56 km/h).

●The 7-pin connector for Trailer

Brake controller is not engaged (if

equipped) or when trailer is not

detected using the Blind Spot

Monitor (BSM) sensors.

■ RCTA function detection

areas

■Setting the buzzer volume

The areas that vehicles can be

detected in are outlined below.

The buzzer volume of the RCTA,

intuitive parking assist (if equipped),

and RCD (if equipped) can be

adjusted all together through a cus-

tomize setting. (P.637)

■Muting a buzzer temporarily

When an object is detected, the

temporary mute switch is displayed

on the multimedia Display.

Select the switch to mute the buzzer

of the intuitive parking assist (if

equipped), RCTA, and RCD (if

equipped) all together.

The buzzer can alert the driver

of faster vehicles approaching

from farther away.

Mute will be canceled automatically

in the following situations:

●When the shift lever is changed.

●When the vehicle speed exceeds

a certain speed.

Example:

●When there is a malfunction in a

sensor or the system is temporar-

ily unavailable.

Approaching vehi-

cle speed

Approximate

alert distance

34 mph (56 km/h)

(fast)

●When the operating function is

disabled manually.

98 ft. (30 m)

13 ft. (4 m)

●When the engine switch is turned

off

5 mph (8 km/h)

(slow)

■Conditions under which the

system will not detect a vehicle

■The RCTA function is opera-

tional when

The RCTA function is not designed

to detect the following types of vehi-

cles and/or objects:

The RCTA function operates when

all of the following conditions are

met:

●Vehicles approaching from directly

behind

●The engine switch is in ON.

●Vehicles backing up in a parking

333

4-5. Using the driving support systems

space next to your vehicle

●When a vehicle is approaching at

high speed

●Vehicles that the sensors cannot

detect due to obstructions

●When equipment that may

obstruct a sensor is installed, such

as a towing eyelet, bumper pro-

tector (an additional trim strip,

etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow

●When backing up on a slope with

a sharp change in grade

●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked

vehicles and similar stationary

*

objects

●Small motorcycles, bicycles,

*

pedestrians, etc.

●Vehicles moving away from your

vehicle

4

●Vehicles approaching from the

parking spaces next to your vehi-

*

cle

●The distance between the sensor

and approaching vehicle gets too

close

●When backing out of a sharp

angle parking spot

*

: Depending on the conditions,

detection of a vehicle and/or

object may occur.

■Situations in which the system

may not operate properly

The RCTA function may not detect

vehicles correctly in the following

situations:

●Immediately after the RCTA func-

tion is turned on

●When the sensor is misaligned

due to a strong impact to the sen-

sor or its surrounding area

●Immediately after the engine is

started with the RCTA function on

●When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,

etc.,is covering the sensor or sur-

rounding area on the position

above the rear bumper

●When the sensors cannot detect a

vehicle due to obstructions

●When there is a significant differ-

ence in height between your vehi-

cle and the vehicle that enters the

detection area

●When driving on a wet road sur-

face, such as in a puddle, while in

inclement weather, such as heavy

rain, snow, fog, etc.

●When a sensor or the area around

a sensor is extremely hot or cold

●When multiple vehicles are

approaching with only a small gap

between each vehicle

●If the suspension has been modi-

334

4-5. Using the driving support systems

fied or tires of a size other than

specified are installed

●If the front of the vehicle is raised

or lowered due to the carried load

●When turning while backing up

●When equipment that may

obstruct a sensor is installed, such

as a towing eyelet, bumper pro-

tector (an additional trim strip,

etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow

●When a vehicle passes by the

side of your vehicle

●When a vehicle turns into the

detection area

●When a detected vehicle turns

while approaching the vehicle

■Situations in which the system

may operate even if there is no

possibility of a collision

Instances of the RCTA function

unnecessary detecting a vehicle

and/or object may increase in the

following situations:

●When the parking space faces a

street and vehicles are being

driven on the street

●When there are spinning objects

near your vehicle such as the fan

of an air conditioning unit

●When water is splashed or

sprayed toward the rear bumper,

such as from a sprinkler

●Moving objects (flags, exhaust

fumes, large rain droplets or

snowflakes, rain water on the road

surface, etc.)

●When the distance between your

vehicle and metal objects, such as

a guardrail, wall, sigh, or parked

vehicle, which may reflect electri-

cal waves toward the rear of the

vehicle, is short

●When the distance between your

vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.,

that enters the detection area is

short

●Gratings and gutters

335

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●When a sensor or the area around

RCD (Rear Camera

a sensor is extremely hot or cold

*

Detection)

●If the suspension has been modi-

fied or tires of a size other than

specified are installed

*

: If equipped

●If the front of the vehicle is raised

or lowered due to the carried load

When the vehicle is backing

up, the rear camera detec-

tion function can detect

pedestrians in the detec-

tion area behind the vehicle.

If a pedestrian is detected, a

buzzer will sound and an

icon will be displayed on

the multimedia display to

inform the driver of the

pedestrian.

4

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of

the system

The recognition and control capa-

bilities for this system are limited.

The driver should always drive

safely by always being responsi-

ble without over relying on the

system and have a understanding

of the surrounding situations.

■To ensure the system can

operate properly

Observe the following, otherwise

there is the danger that could lead

to an accident.

●Always clean the camera with-

out damaging it.

●Do not install market electronic

parts (such as Illuminated

license plate, fog lamps, etc.) in

the camera vicinity.

336

4-5. Using the driving support systems

RCD display

WARNING

●Do not subject the camera vicin-

ity to strong impacts. If the vicin-

ity is subjected to a strong

impact, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota

dealer.

●Do not disassemble, remodel or

paint the camera.

●Do not attach accessories or

stickers to the camera.

Pedestrian detection icon

●Do not install market protection

parts (bumper trim, etc.) to the

rear bumper.

Displayed automatically when a

pedestrian is detected behind the

vehicle.

●Maintain suitable tire air pres-

sure.

●Make sure the back door is

Turning the RCD function

on/off

completely closed.

■When to disable the RCD

function

The RCD function can be

enabled/disabled through a cus-

tomize setting. (P.637)

In the following situations, disable

the system. The RCD function

may not operate properly, possi-

bly leading to an accident.

When the RCD function is disabled,

the driving assist information indi-

cator (P.78) illuminates, and a

message is displayed on the multi-

information display.

●The contents mentioned above

are not observed.

●Suspensions other than the

genuine parts are installed.

Each time the engine switch is

turned off then changed to ON, the

RCD function will be enabled auto-

matically.

System component

Location of the rear camera

When a pedestrian is

detected

If a pedestrian is in the area

behind the vehicle or if the rear

camera detected that a pedes-

trian is approaching the vehicle

from behind, the system urges

caution from the driver by

337

4-5. Using the driving support systems

sounding the buzzer and dis-

Blinks

playing the detection of a pedes-

trian on the multimedia display

as follows:

■When towing a trailer

●When Auto Trailer Detection

(ATD) (P.318) is activated, the

function turns off.

●When the shift position is in R, the

intuitive parking assist OFF indica-

tor (P.74) turns ON and a mes-

sage is displayed in the multi-

information display.

●If a camera malfunction occurs

while the trailer is connected,

There may be cases where the

notification message that indicate

Intuitive Parking Assist, RCD, or

PKSB is OFF may not be dis-

played

4

■The rear camera detection func-

tion is operational when

●The engine switch is in ON.

●RCD function is on.

If a pedestrian is detected in

area

●The shift position is in R.

■Setting the buzzer volume

Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly

Pedestrian detection icon:

Blinks

The buzzer volume of the intuitive

parking assist, RCTA, and RCD can

all be changed at once from the cus-

tomize settings. (P.637)

If a pedestrian is detected in

area

■Muting a buzzer temporarily

Buzzer (When the vehicle is

stationary): Sounds 3 times

Buzzer (When the vehicle is

backing up, when a pedes-

trian approaches the rear of

the vehicle): Sounds repeat-

edly

When an object is detected, the

temporary mute switch is displayed

on the multimedia display. Select

the switch to mute a buzzer of the

intuitive parking assist, RCTA, and

RCD all together.

Mute will be automatically canceled

in the following situations:

●When the shift position is

changed.

Pedestrian detection icon:

Blinks

●When the vehicle speed exceeds

a certain speed.

If the system determines that

your vehicle may collide with

●When there is a malfunction in a

sensor or the system is temporar-

ily unavailable.

a pedestrian in area

Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly

Pedestrian detection icon:

●When the operating function is

disabled manually.

338

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●When the engine switch is turned

off.

on the camera lens

• When the vehicle height is

extremely changed (nose up,

nose down, etc.)

• When tire chains or an emergency

tire puncture repair kit are used

• When the suspension has been

lowered or tires that have a differ-

ent size than the genuine tires are

installed

■Situations in which the system

may not operate properly

●Some pedestrians, such as the

following, may not be detected by

the rear camera detection func-

tion, preventing the function from

operating properly:

• Pedestrians who are bending for-

ward or squatting

• When an aftermarket electronic

part (backlit license plate, fog

light, etc.) is installed near the rear

camera

• If a bumper protector, such as an

additional trim strip, is installed to

the rear bumper

• Pedestrians who are lying down

• Pedestrians who are running

• Pedestrians who suddenly appear

from the shadow of the vehicle or

a building

• Pedestrians who are riding mov-

ing objects such as a bicycle or

skateboard

■Situations in which the system

may operate unexpectedly

• Pedestrians wearing oversized

clothing such as a rain coat, long

skirt, etc., making their silhouette

obscure

• Pedestrians whose body is par-

tially hidden by an object, such as

a cart or umbrella

●Even though there are no pedes-

trians in the detection area, some

objects, such as the following,

may be detected, possibly caus-

ing the rear camera detection

function to operate.

• Three dimensional objects, such

as a pole, traffic cone, fence, or

parked vehicle

• Pedestrians which are obscured

by darkness, such as at night

• Moving objects, such as a car or

motorcycle

●In some situations, such as the

following, pedestrians may not be

detected by the rear camera

detection function, preventing the

function from operating properly:

• When backing up in inclement

weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)

• The lens is dirty (by dirt or snow-

melting agent, etc.) or scratched

• When a very bright light, such as

the sun, or the headlights of

another vehicle, shines directly

into the rear camera

• When backing up in a place where

the surrounding brightness

changes suddenly, such as at the

entrance or exit of a garage or

underground parking lot

• When backing up in a dim envi-

ronment such as during dusk or in

an underground parking lot

• Objects moving toward your vehi-

cle when backing up, such as

flags or puddles (or airborne mat-

ter, such as smoke, steam, rain, or

snow)

• Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram

rails, road repairs, white lines,

pedestrian crossings or fallen

leaves on the road

• Metal covers (gratings), such as

those used for drainage ditches

• Objects reflected in a puddle or on

a wet road surface

• Shadows on the road

●In some situations, such as the

following, the rear camera detec-

tion function may operate even

though there are no pedestrians in

the detection area.

• When the camera position and

direction are deviated

• When a towing hook is attached

• When water droplets are flowing

• When backing up toward the road-

side or a bump on the road

• When backing up toward an

incline/decline

339

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When the vehicle height is

extremely changed (nose up,

nose down, etc.)

PKSB (Parking Sup-

*

port Brake)

• When an aftermarket electronic

part (backlit license plate, fog

light, etc.) is installed near the rear

camera

*

: If equipped

The PKSB (Parking Sup-

• If a bumper protector, such as an

additional trim strip, is installed to

the rear bumper

• If the orientation of the rear cam-

era has been changed due to a

collision or other impact, or

removal and installation

• If a towing eyelet is installed to the

rear of the vehicle

• When water is flowing over the

rear camera lens

port Brake) is a system that

issues warnings and auto-

matically performs braking

to help reduce collision

damage with operation tar-

gets that were detected

when traveling at a low

speed such as when park-

ing.

• The lens is dirty (by dirt or snow-

melting agent, etc.)

• If there is a flashing light in the

detection area, such as the emer-

gency flashers of another vehicle

• When tire chains or an emergency

tire puncture repair kit are used

4

PKSB (Parking Support

Brake) system

The system has detected the

following as operation targets.

(The operation targets vary

depending on the function.)

●Situations in which the rear cam-

era detection function may be diffi-

cult to notice

• The buzzer may be difficult to hear

if the surrounding area is noisy or

the audio system volume is high.

• If the temperature in the cabin is

extremely high or low, the multi-

media display may not operate

correctly.

 Parking Support Brake func-

tion (static objects front and

rear of the vehicle):

P.344

 Parking Support Brake func-

tion (moving vehicles rear of

the vehicle):

P.347

 Parking Support Brake func-

tion (pedestrians rear of the

vehicle) (if equipped):

P.348

340

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●When inspecting the vehicle

using a chassis roller, chassis

dynamo or free roller

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of

the system

●When loading the vehicle onto a

boat, truck or other transport

vessel

Do not overly rely on the system,

as doing so may lead to an acci-

dent. Always drive while checking

the safety of the surroundings of

the vehicle.

●If the suspension has been

modified or tires of a size other

than specified are installed

Depending on the vehicle and

road conditions, weather, etc., the

system may not operate.

●If the front of the vehicle is

raised or lowered due to the

carried load

The detection capabilities of sen-

sors and radars are limited.

Always drive while checking the

safety of the surroundings of the

vehicle.

●When equipment such as a tow-

ing hook, transport hook,

bumper protector, bumper trim,

bicycle carrier or snow-removal

device (snow plow) is installed

near the sensor

●The driver is solely responsible

for safe driving. Always drive

carefully, taking care to observe

your surroundings. The Parking

Support Brake system is

designed to provide support to

lessen the severity of collisions.

However, it may not operate in

some situations.

●When using automatic car

washing devices

●If the vehicle cannot be driven in

a stable manner, such as when

the vehicle has been in an acci-

dent or is malfunctioning

●The Parking Support Brake sys-

tem is not designed to stop the

vehicle completely. Additionally,

even if the system has stopped

the vehicle, it is necessary to

depress the brake pedal imme-

diately as brake control will be

canceled after approximately 2

seconds.

●When the vehicle is driven in a

sporty manner or off-road

●When the tires are not properly

inflated

●When the tires are very worn

●When tire chains, a compact

spare tire or an emergency tire

puncture repair kit are used.

●It is extremely dangerous to

check the system operations by

intentionally driving the vehicle

into the direction of a wall, etc.

Never attempt such actions.

■Precautions for the suspen-

sion

Do not modify the suspension of

the vehicle. If the height or tilt of

the vehicle is changed, the sen-

sors may not be able to detect

detectable objects and the system

may not operate correctly, possi-

bly leading to an accident.

■When to disable the Parking

Support Brake

In the following situations, disable

the Parking Support Brake as the

system may operate even though

there is no possibility of a colli-

sion.

341

4-5. Using the driving support systems

while the trailer is connected,

Enabling/Disabling the

Parking Support Brake

There may be cases where the

notification message that indi-

cates Intuitive Parking Assist,

RCD (if equipped), or PKSB is

OFF may not be displayed.

The Parking Support Brake

function can be enabled/dis-

abled through a customize set-

ting. (P.637)

Display and buzzer for

engine output restriction

control and brake control

When the PKSB (Parking Sup-

port Brake) is disabled, the driv-

ing assist information indicator

(P.78) illuminates, and a mes-

sage is displayed on the multi-

information display.

If the engine output restriction con-

trol or brake control operates, a

buzzer will sound and a message

that indicates limited acceleration

or prompts the driver to brake will

be displayed on the multimedia dis-

play and multi-information display,

to alert the driver.

If the system switches to OFF

(disabled) and the PKSB (Park-

ing Support Brake) is stopped,

the PKSB (Parking Support

Brake) will not be re-enabled

until ON (enabled) is selected

again from the customize setting

(P.637).

(It remains off even if the engine

switch is turned to ON again

after the engine switch has been

turned off.)

4

Depending on the situation, output

restriction control operates to either

limit acceleration or restrict output

as much as possible.

 Engine output restriction con-

trol is operating (acceleration

restriction)

Acceleration greater than a certain

amount is restricted by the system.

Multimedia display: No warning dis-

played

■When the four-wheel drive con-

trol switch is in “4L” (part-time

4WD models) or “L4L” (full-time

4WD models)

Message example on the multi-

information display: “Object

Detected Acceleration Reduced”

The Parking Support Brake function

automatically turns off.

Driving assist information indicator:

Not illuminated

■When towing a trailer

●When Auto Trailer Detection

(ATD) (P.318) is activated, the

function turns off.

Buzzer: Does not sound

 Engine output restriction con-

trol is operating (output

restricted as much as possi-

ble)

●When the shift position is in R, the

intuitive parking assist OFF indica-

tor (P.74) turns on and a mes-

sage is displayed in the multi-

information display.

The system has determined that

●If a camera malfunction occurs

342

4-5. Using the driving support systems

*

stronger-than-normal brake opera-

tion is necessary.

: This may not be displayed

depending on the specification of

the panoramic view monitor.

Message example on the multime-

dia display (vehicles with pan-

*

System overview

oramic view monitor and multi-

terrain monitor): “BRAKE!”

If the Parking Support Brake

determines that a collision with a

detected object or pedestrian is

possible, the engine output will

be restricted to restrain any

increase in the vehicle speed.

(Engine output restriction con-

trol: See figure 2 below.)

Message example on the multi-

information display: “BRAKE!”

Driving assist information indicator:

Not illuminated

Buzzer: Short beep

 Brake control is operating

The system determined that emer-

gency braking is necessary.

Additionally, if the accelerator

pedal continues to be

Message example on the multime-

dia display (vehicles with pan-

depressed, the brakes will be

applied automatically to reduce

the vehicle speed. (Brake con-

trol: See figure 3.)

*

oramic view monitor and multi-

terrain monitor): “BRAKE!”

Message example on the multi-

information display: “BRAKE!”

 Figure 1: When the PKSB

(Parking Support Brake) is not

operating

Driving assist information indicator:

Not illuminated

Buzzer: Short beep

 Vehicle stopped by system

operation

The vehicle has been stopped by

brake control operation.

Message example on the multime-

dia display (vehicles with pan-

*

oramic view monitor and multi-

terrain monitor): “Switch to Brake”

Engine output

Braking force

Time

Message example on the multi-

information display: “Accelerator

Pedal is Pressed Press Brake

Pedal”, “Press brake Pedal”

Driving assist information indicator:

Illuminated

Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly

343

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Figure 2: When engine out-

put restriction control oper-

ates

determines that possibility of

collision with detected object

is high)

Brake control begins operat-

ing (System determines that

possibility of collision with

detected object is extremely

high)

■If the Parking Support Brake

has operated

If the vehicle is stopped due to oper-

ation of the Parking Support Brake,

the Parking Support Brake will be

disabled and the driving assist infor-

mation indicator will illuminate.

In addition, even when the PKSB

(Parking Support Brake) operates,

the brake control is canceled after

approximately 2 seconds to start off.

Furthermore, the brake control also

can be canceled by depressing the

brake pedal. Depressing the accel-

erator pedal again after that allows

the vehicle to start off.

Engine output

Braking force

Time

4

Engine output restriction con-

trol begins operating (System

determines that possibility of

collision with detected object

is high)

 Figure 3: When engine out-

put restriction control and

brake control operates

■Re-enabling the Parking Sup-

port Brake

To re-enable the Parking Support

Brake when it is disabled due to

operation of the PKSB (Parking

Support Brake), either enable the

system again, or turn the engine

switch off and then back to ON.

Additionally, if any of the following

conditions are met, the system will

be re-enabled automatically and the

driving assist information indicator

will turn off (P.78):

●The P shift position is selected

●Drive with no operation targets in

the traveling direction of the vehi-

cle

Engine output

Braking force

Time

●Change the traveling direction of

the vehicle

■Buzzer

Engine output restriction con-

trol begins operating (System

Regardless of whether the intuitive

344

4-5. Using the driving support systems

parking assist sensor is enabled or

not (P.324), if the PKSB (Parking

Support Brake) system is enabled

(P.341), the buzzer will sound to

notify the driver of the approximate

distance to the object when the

brake control and the engine output

restriction control are operated.

Parking Support Brake

func tion (static

objects front and rear

*

of the vehicle)

*

: If equipped

If the sensors detect a static

object, such as a wall, in the

traveling direction of the

vehicle and the system

determines that a collision

may occur due to the vehi-

cle suddenly moving for-

ward due to an accidental

accelerator pedal operation,

the vehicle moving the

unintended direction due to

the wrong shift position

being selected, or while

parking or traveling at low

speeds, the system will

operate to lessen the impact

with the detected static

object and reduce the

resulting damage.

Examples of function

operation (static objects

front and rear of the vehi-

cle)

This function will operate in situ-

ations such as the following if an

object is detected in the travel-

ing direction of the vehicle.

345

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ When traveling at a low ■ When the vehicle moves

speed and the brake pedal

is not depressed, or is

depressed late

forward due to the incorrect

shift position being

selected

4

■ When the accelerator pedal

Types of sensors

P.323

is depressed excessively

WARNING

■To ensure the system can

operate properly

P.324

■If the Parking Support Brake

function operates unneces-

sarily, such as at a railroad

crossing

P.343

■Notes when washing the vehi-

cle

P.325

■The Parking Support Brake

function (static objects front

and rear of the vehicle) will

operate when

The function will operate when the

driving assist information indicator is

not illuminated (P.74) and all of

the following conditions are met:

346

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is

enabled.

• The vehicle speed is approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.

• There is a static object in the trav-

eling direction of the vehicle and

approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)

away.

• The Parking Support Brake deter-

mines that a stronger-than-nor-

mal brake operation is necessary

to avoid a collision.

■Detection range of the Parking

Support Brake function (static

objects front and rear of the

vehicle)

The detection range of the Parking

Support Brake function (static

objects front and rear of the vehicle)

differs from the detection range of

the intuitive parking assist (P.328).

Therefore, even if the intuitive park-

ing assist detects an object and pro-

vides a warning, the Parking

Support Brake function (static

objects front and rear of the vehicle)

may not start operating.

●Brake control

• Engine output restriction control is

operating.

• The Parking Support Brake deter-

mines that an immediate brake

operation is necessary to avoid a

collision.

■Situations in which the system

may not operate properly

P.326

■Situations in which the system

may operate even if there is no

possibility of a collision

■The Parking Support Brake

function (static objects front

and rear of the vehicle) will stop

operating when

P.327

The function will stop operating if

any of the following conditions are

met:

●Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is dis-

abled.

• The system determines that the

collision has become avoidable

with normal brake operation.

• The static object is no longer

approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)

away from the vehicle or in the

traveling direction of the vehicle.

●Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is dis-

abled.

• Approximately 2 seconds have

elapsed since the vehicle was

stopped by brake control.

• The brake pedal is depressed

after the vehicle is stopped by

brake control.

• The static object is no longer

approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)

away from the vehicle or in the

traveling direction of the vehicle.

347

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Parking Support Brake

Types of sensors

P.323

function (moving vehi-

cles rear of the vehi-

*

cle)

WARNING

■To ensure the system can

operate properly

*

: If equipped

If a rear radar sensor

P.317

detects a vehicle approach-

ing from the right or left at

the rear of the vehicle and

the system determines that

the possibility of a collision

is high, this function will

perform brake control to

reduce the likelihood of an

impact with the approach-

ing vehicle.

■The Parking Support Brake

function (moving vehicles rear

of the vehicle) will operate

when

The function will operate when the

driving assist information indicator is

not illuminated (P.74) and all of

the following conditions are met:

4

●Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is

enabled.

• The vehicle speed is approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.

• Vehicles are approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehi-

cle at a traveling speed of approx-

imately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.

• The shift position is in R.

• The Parking Support Brake deter-

mines that a stronger than normal

brake operation is necessary to

avoid a collision with an approach-

ing vehicle.

Examples of the function

operation

This function will operate in situ-

ations such as the following if a

vehicle is detected in the travel-

ing direction of the vehicle.

■ When reversing, a vehicle is

approaching and the brake

pedal is not depressed, or

is depressed late

●Brake control

• Engine output restriction control is

operating.

• The Parking Support Brake deter-

mined that an emergency brake

operation was necessary to avoid

a collision with a vehicle

approaching from the rear.

■The Parking Support Brake

function (moving vehicles rear

of the vehicle) will stop operat-

ing when

The function will stop operating if

any of the following conditions are

met:

●Engine output restriction control

348

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• The Parking Support Brake is dis-

abled.

Parking Support Brake

function (pedestrians

rear of the vehicle)

• The collision becomes avoidable

with normal brake operation.

• A vehicle is no longer approaching

from the right or left at the rear of

the vehicle.

*

: If equipped

●Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is dis-

abled.

• Approximately 2 seconds have

elapsed since the vehicle was

stopped by brake control.

• The brake pedal is depressed

after the vehicle is stopped by

brake control.

If the rear camera sensor

detects a pedestrian behind

the vehicle while backing

up and the system deter-

mines that the possibility of

colliding with the detected

pedestrian is high, a buzzer

will sound. If the system

determines that the possi-

bility of colliding with the

detected pedestrian is

■Situations in which the system

may not operate properly

P.333

■Situations in which the system

may operate even if there is no

possibility of a collision

extremely high, the brakes

will be applied automati-

cally to help reduce the

impact of the collision.

P.334

Examples of system oper-

ation

The system operates when an

approaching pedestrian is

detected behind the vehicle

while backing up, and when the

brake pedal is not depressed or

is depressed late.

349

4-5. Using the driving support systems

the following conditions are met:

Screen display of pedes-

trians rear of the vehicle

●Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is

enabled.

• The vehicle speed is 9 mph (15

km/h) or less.

• The shift position is in R.

• When a pedestrian is to the rear of

the vehicle

• The PKSB (Parking Support

Brake) determines that a stronger-

than-normal-brake operation is

necessary to avoid a collision.

Displays a message to prompt

the driver to brake when a

pedestrian is detected in the

detection area behind the vehi-

cle.

●Brake control

• Engine output restriction control is

operating.

• The Parking Support Brake deter-

mines that an emergency brake

operation is necessary to avoid a

collision with a pedestrian.

4

■The Parking Support Brake

function (pedestrians rear of

the vehicle) will stop operating

when

Pedestrian detection icon

Example: “BRAKE!”

The function will stop operating if

any of the following conditions are

met:

WARNING

●Engine output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is dis-

abled.

• The collision becomes avoidable

with normal brake operation.

• The pedestrian is no longer

detected behind your vehicle.

■If the Parking Support Brake

function (pedestrians rear of

the vehicle) operates unnec-

essarily

Depress the brake pedal immedi-

ately after the Parking Support

Brake function (pedestrians rear

of the vehicle) operates. (Opera-

tion of the function is canceled by

depressing the brake pedal.)

●Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is dis-

abled.

• Approximately 2 seconds have

elapsed since the vehicle was

stopped by brake control.

• The brake pedal is depressed

after the vehicle is stopped by

brake control.

■Correct use of the Parking

Support Brake function

(pedestrians rear of the vehi-

cle)

P.335

■Re-enabling the Parking Sup-

port Brake function (pedestri-

ans rear of the vehicle)

■The Parking Support Brake

function (pedestrians rear of

the vehicle) will operate when

P.343

The function will operate when the

driving assist information indicator is

not illuminated (P.335) and all of

350

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Detection area of the Parking

Support Brake function (pedes-

trians rear of the vehicle)

Toyota park ing assist

*

monitor

The detection area of the Parking

Support Brake function (pedestrians

rear of the vehicle) differs from the

detection area of the RCD function

(P.336). Therefore, even if the

RCD function detects a pedestrian

and provides an alert, the Parking

Support Brake function (pedestrians

rear of the vehicle) may not start

operating.

*

: If equipped

The parking assist monitor

assists the driver by dis-

playing an image of the

view behind the vehicle

while backing up, for exam-

ple while parking.

■Situations in which the system

may not operate properly

When the display is

changed to the wide rear

view mode, a wider lateral

view behind the vehicle will

be displayed.

P.338

■Situations in which the system

may operate unexpectedly

P.338

●The screen illustrations used in

this text are intended as exam-

ples, and may differ from the

image that is actually displayed on

the screen.

Driving precautions

The parking assist monitor is a

supplemental device intended to

assist the driver when backing

up. When backing up, be sure to

visually check all around the

vehicle both directly and using

the mirrors before proceeding. If

you do not, you may hit another

vehicle, and could possibly

cause an accident.

Pay attention to the following

precautions when using the

parking assist monitor.

351

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●In low temperatures, the screen

may darken or the image may

become faint. The image could

distort when the vehicle is mov-

ing, or you may become unable

to see the image on the screen.

Be sure to visually check all

around the vehicle both directly

and using the mirrors before

proceeding.

WARNING

●Never depend on the parking

assist monitor entirely when

backing up. The image and the

position of the guide lines dis-

played on the screen may differ

from the actual state.

Use caution, just as you would

when backing up any vehicle.

●Be sure to back up slowly,

depressing the brake pedal to

control vehicle speed.

●If the tire sizes are changed, the

position of the guide lines dis-

played on the screen may

change.

●If you seem likely to hit nearby

vehicles, obstacles, people or

mount the shoulder, depress the

brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

●The camera uses a special lens.

The distances between objects

and pedestrians that appear in

the image displayed on the

screen will differ from the actual

distances. (P.357)

●The instructions given are only

guidelines. When and how

much to turn the steering wheel

will vary according to traffic con-

ditions, road surface condi-

tions, vehicle condition, etc.,

when parking. It is necessary to

be fully aware of this before

using the parking assist system.

4

Screen display

The parking assist monitor

screen will be displayed if the

shift lever is shifted to R while

the engine switch is in ON.

●When parking, be sure to check

that the parking space will

accommodate your vehicle

before maneuvering into it.

Each time the display mode

switching button is selected, the

mode will change as follows:

●Do not use the parking assist

monitor in the following cases:

Rear view: Displays the rear view of

the vehicle.

• On icy or slick road surfaces, or

in snow

Wide rear view: Displays a near

180° image from the rear view cam-

era.

• When using tire chains or emer-

gency tires

• When the back door is not

closed completely

• On roads that are not flat or

straight, such as curves or

slopes

• If the suspension has been

modified or tires of a size other

than specified are installed

352

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Display mode switching but-

ton

Canceling Toyota parking

assist monitor

Each time the button is selected,

the rear view mode and the wide

rear view mode are switched.

The parking assist monitor is

canceled when the shift lever is

shifted into any position other

than R.

Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line

mode. (P.352)

• Each time the button is selected,

the display mode changes in the

following order:

Using the system

Use any of the following modes.

Estimated course line display mode

 Parking assist guide line display

mode  Distance guide line display

mode  Center guide line display

mode.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

When a sensor detects a vehicle

approaching from the rear, the

direction of the vehicle approaching

from the rear is displayed and the

buzzer sounds.

 Estimated course line display

mode (P.353)

Estimated course lines are dis-

played which move in accor-

dance with the operation of the

steering wheel.

Intuitive parking assist^*

When a sensor detects a stationary

object, the direction of and the

approximate distance to the a sta-

tionary object are displayed and the

buzzer sounds.

*

: If equipped

●For details about the Rear Cross

Traffic Alert function (P.330) and

intuitive parking assist. (P.323)

WARNING

 Parking assist guide line dis-

play mode (P.354)

●As the Rear Cross Traffic Alert

display is displayed over the

camera view, it may be difficult

to see the Rear Cross Traffic

Alert display depending on the

color and brightness of the sur-

rounding area.

The steering wheel return points

(parking assist guide lines) are

displayed.

353

4-5. Using the driving support systems

This mode is recommended for

those who are comfortable with

parking the vehicle without the

aid of the estimated course

lines.

Estimated course line dis-

play mode

Screen description

 Distance guide line display

mode (P.355)

4

Distance guide lines only are

displayed.

This mode is recommended for

those who are comfortable with

parking the vehicle without the

aid of the guide lines.

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the

vehicle is being backed straight up.

Estimated course lines

Show an estimated course when

the steering wheel is turned.

Distance guide lines

Show distance behind the vehicle

when the steering wheel is turned.

• The guide lines move in conjunc-

tion with the estimated course

lines.

• The guide lines display points

approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red)

and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yel-

low) from the center of the edge

of the bumper.

 Center guide line display

mode (P.355)

Estimated course lines and

vehicle center line are displayed

which move in accordance with

the operation of the steering

wheel.

354

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

Distance guide line

• Displays points approximately 1.5

ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of

the bumper.

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately

1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the

edge of the bumper.

Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle

center on the ground.

Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle

center on the ground.

Distance guide line dis-

play mode

WARNING

●If the steering wheel is straight

and the vehicle width guide

lines and the estimated course

lines are not in alignment, have

the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

Screen description

Parking assist guide line

display mode

Screen description

Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays points approximately 1.5

ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of

the bumper.

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the

vehicle is being backed straight up.

• The displayed width is wider than

the actual vehicle width.

Parking assist guide lines

Show the path of the smallest turn

possible behind the vehicle.

Distance guide line

355

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Rear view

Center guide line display

mode

Screen description

Center guide line

4

Indicates the estimated vehicle

center.

Corners of bumper

• The area around both corners of

the bumper will not be displayed.

Toyota parking assist

monitor precautions

 Wide rear view

Area displayed on screen

The parking assist monitor dis-

plays an image of the view from

the bumper of the rear area of

the vehicle.

Corners of bumper

356

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• The area around both corners of

the bumper will not be displayed.

camera lens clean with a soft

and wet cloth.

Dirt on the camera lens can be

cleaned by operating the dedi-

cated camera cleaning washer.

(P.243)

●The image adjustment procedure

for the parking assist monitor

screen is the same as the proce-

dure for adjusting the screen dis-

play. (Refer to the “MULTIMEDIA

OWNER’S MANUAL”.)

■Cleaning the camera with

●The area displayed on the screen

may vary according to vehicle ori-

entation conditions.

washer fluid

●When cleaning the camera, it may

be difficult to see the image due to

the washer fluid. Therefore, take

care in the surrounding area while

driving.

●Objects which are close to either

corner of the bumper or under the

bumper cannot be displayed.

●The camera uses a special lens.

The distance of the image that

appears on the screen differs from

the actual distance.

●If washer fluid remains on the

camera lens surface after clean-

ing, the image may be difficult to

see at night due to the height or

inclination of the headlights of the

vehicle behind. In this case,

●Items which are located higher

than the camera may not be dis-

played on the monitor.

change to optical mirror mode.

●Some dirts may not be removed

completely after cleaning. In this

case, rinse the camera lens with a

large quantity of water and then

wipe it clean with a soft cloth

dampened with water.

The camera

The camera for the parking

assist monitor is located as

shown in the illustration.

●Washer fluid is sprayed onto the

camera lens surface. Therefore,

the ice, snow, etc. adhering

around the camera cannot be

removed.

NOTICE

●The parking assist monitor may

not operate properly in the fol-

lowing cases.

• If the back of the vehicle is hit,

the position and mounting angle

of the camera may change.

■ Using the camera

If dirt or foreign matter (such as

water droplets, snow, mud, etc.)

is adhering to the camera, it

cannot transmit a clear image.

In this case, flush it with a large

quantity of water and wipe the

• As the camera has a water

proof construction, do not

detach, disassemble or modify

it. This may cause incorrect

operation.

357

4-5. Using the driving support systems

be equal, even when they

appear to be so. Be sure to

check visually.

• When cleaning the camera lens,

flush the camera with a large

quantity of water and wipe it

with a soft and wet cloth.

Strongly rubbing the camera

lens may cause the camera lens

to be scratched and unable to

transmit a clear image.

 The distance guide lines give

a distance guide for flat road

surfaces. In any of the follow-

ing situations, there is a mar-

gin of error between the guide

lines on the screen and the

actual distance/course on the

road.

• Do not allow organic solvent,

car wax, window cleaner or a

glass coating to adhere to the

camera. If this happens, wipe it

off as soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rap-

idly, such as when hot water is

poured on the vehicle in cold

weather, the system may not

operate normally.

■ When the ground behind

the vehicle slopes up

sharply

The distance guidelines are pro-

jected on a horizontal surface,

distances on an upward sloping

surface appear farther from the

vehicle than the actual distance.

Because of this, objects will

appear to be farther away than

they actually are. In the same

way, there will be a margin of

error between the guidelines

and the actual distance/course

on the road.

4

• When washing the vehicle, do

not apply intensive bursts of

water to the camera or camera

area. Doing so may result in the

camera malfunctioning.

●Do not expose the camera to

strong impact as this could

cause a malfunction. If this hap-

pens, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

Differences between the

screen and the actual road

 The distance guide lines and

the vehicle width guide lines

may not actually be parallel

with the dividing lines of the

parking space, even when

they appear to be so. Be sure

to check visually.

 The distances between the

vehicle width guide lines and

the left and right dividing lines

of the parking space may not

358

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ When the ground behind

the vehicle slopes down

sharply

■ When any part of the vehi-

cle sags

When the vehicle posture tilts

due to the number of passen-

gers or the distribution of the

load, there is a margin of error

between the guide lines on the

screen and the actual dis-

The distance guidelines are pro-

jected on a horizontal surface,

distances on an downward slop-

ing surface appear closer to the

vehicle than the actual distance.

Because of this, objects will

appear to be closer than they

actually are. In the same way,

there will be a margin of error

between the guidelines and the

actual distance/course on the

road.

tance/course on the road.

A margin of error

359

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When approaching three-

dimensional objects

The estimated course lines tar-

get flat surfaced objects (such

as the road). It is not possible to

determine the position of three-

dimensional objects (such as

vehicles) using the estimated

course lines and distance guide

lines. When approaching a

three-dimensional object that

extends outward (such as the

flatbed of a truck), be careful of

the following.

4

Estimated course lines

Visually check the surroundings

and the area behind the vehicle.

In the case shown below, the

truck appears to be outside of

the estimated course lines and

the vehicle does not look as if it

hits the truck. However, the rear

body of the truck may actually

cross over the estimated course

lines. In reality if you back up as

guided by the estimated course

lines, the vehicle may hit the

truck.

Distance guide lines

Visually check the surroundings

and the area behind the vehicle.

On the screen, it appears that a

truck is parking at point

.

However, in reality if you back

up to point , you will hit the

truck. On the screen, it appears

that

is closest and

is far-

thest away. However, in reality,

the distance to

and

is the

same, and

is farther than

and

.

360

4-5. Using the driving support systems

361

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Things you should know

If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause

and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Symptom

Likely cause

Solution

 The vehicle is in a dark

area

 The temperature

around the lens is

either high or low

 The outside tempera-

ture is low

Back up while visually

checking the vehicle’s

surroundings. (Use the

monitor again once con-

ditions have been

4

 There are water drop-

lets on the camera

improved.)

The procedure for

The image is difficult to  It is raining or humid

adjusting the picture

quality of the parking

assist monitor is the

same as the procedure

for adjusting the screen

display. (Refer to the

“MULTIMEDIA

see

 Foreign matter (mud,

etc.) is adhering to the

camera

 Sunlight or headlights

are shining directly

into the camera

 The vehicle is under

fluorescent lights,

sodium lights, mer-

cury lights, etc.

OWNER’S MANUAL”.)

Flush the camera with a

large quantity of water

and wipe the camera

lens clean with a soft

and wet cloth.

Dirt or foreign matter

(such as water droplets,

snow, mud, etc.) is

The image is blurry

Operate the dedicated

camera cleaning washer

and clean the camera

lens. (P.243)

adhering to the camera.

362

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Symptom

Likely cause

Solution

The camera or sur-

rounding area has

received a strong

impact.

Have the vehicle

inspected by your Toy-

ota dealer.

The image is out of

alignment

Have the vehicle

inspected by your Toy-

ota dealer.

The camera position is

out of alignment.

If this happens due to

these causes, it does

not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

 The vehicle is tilted

(there is a heavy load

on the vehicle, tire

pressure is low due to

a tire puncture, etc.)

 The vehicle is used on

an incline.

The guide lines are

very far out of align-

ment

Back up while visually

checking the vehicle’s

surroundings.

The estimated course

lines move even

though the steering

wheel is straight

There is a malfunction in Have the vehicle

the signals being output inspected by your Toy-

by the steering sensor. ota dealer.

Close the back door.

If this does not resolve

the symptom, have the

vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

Guide lines are not dis-

played

The back door is open.

 Battery has been rein-

stalled.

 The steering wheel

has been moved while

the battery was being

reinstalled.

Stop the vehicle, and

turn the steering wheel

as far as it will go to the

left and right.

 Battery power is low.

 The steering sensor

has been reinstalled.

 There is a malfunction

in the signals being

output by the steering

sensor.

is displayed

If this does not resolve

the symptom, have the

vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

363

4-5. Using the driving support systems

bly cause an accident.

Panoramic view moni-

*

Pay attention to the following

precautions when using the

panoramic view monitor.

tor

*

: If equipped

Panoramic view monitor

assists the driver in viewing

the surroundings, when

operating at low speeds, by

combining the front, side

and rear cameras and dis-

playing a complete vehicle

overhead image on the

screen.

WARNING

●Never depend on the panoramic

view monitor entirely. The

image and the position of the

guide lines displayed on the

screen may differ from the

actual state. Use caution just as

you would when driving any

other vehicle.

●Always make sure to check all

around the vehicle with your

own eyes when driving.

When you press the camera

switch or shift the shift lever

to R while the engine switch

is in ON, the panoramic

4

●Never drive while looking only at

the screen as the image on the

screen is different from actual

conditions. If you are driving

while looking only at the screen,

you may hit a person or an

object, resulting in an accident.

When driving, be sure to check

the vehicle’s surroundings with

your own eyes and the vehicle’s

mirrors.

view monitor operates.

The monitor displays vari-

ous views of the position

and surroundings of the

vehicle.

●The screen illustrations used in

this text are intended as exam-

ples, and may differ from the

image that is actually displayed on

the screen.

●Depending on the circum-

stances of the vehicle (number

of passengers, amount of lug-

gage, etc.), the position of the

guide lines displayed on the

screen may change. Be sure to

check visually around the vehi-

cle before proceeding.

Driving precautions

The panoramic view monitor is a

supplemental device intended to

assist the driver when checking

around the vehicle. When using,

be sure to visually check all

around the vehicle both directly

and using the mirrors before

proceeding. If you do not, you

may hit another vehicle or possi-

364

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING NOTICE

●Do not use the panoramic view

monitor system in the following

cases:

●In panoramic view/moving

view/see-through view, the sys-

tem combines images taken

from the front, back, left and

right side cameras into a single

image. There are limits to the

range and content that can be

displayed. Familiarize yourself

with the characteristics of the

panoramic view monitor system

before using it.

• On icy or slick road surfaces, or

in snow

• When using tire chains or emer-

gency tires

• When the front door or the back

door is not closed completely

• On roads that are not flat or

straight, such as curves or

slopes

●Image clarity may decline at the

four corners of the panoramic

view/moving view/see-through

view. However, this is not a mal-

function, as these are the

regions along the border of

each camera image where the

images are combined.

• If the suspension has been

modified or tires of a size other

than specified are installed

●In low temperatures, the screen

may darken or the image may

become faint. The image could

distort when the vehicle is mov-

ing, or you may become unable

to see the image on the screen.

Be sure to visually check all

around the vehicle both directly

and using the mirrors before

proceeding.

●Depending on lighting condi-

tions near each of the cameras,

bright and dark patches may

appear on the panoramic

view/moving view/see-through

view.

●The panoramic view/moving

view/see-through view display

does not extend higher than the

installation position and image

capture range of each camera.

●If the tire sizes are changed, the

position of the guide lines dis-

played on the screen may

change.

●There are blind spots around

the vehicle. Accordingly, there

are regions not displayed in

panoramic view.

●The camera uses a special lens.

The distances between objects

and pedestrians that appear in

the image displayed on the

screen will differ from the actual

distances. (P.390)

●Three-dimensional objects dis-

played in wide front view, rear

view or side view may not be

displayed in panoramic

view/moving view/see-through

view.

●When an aftermarket part is

installed in the display area of

the screen.

365

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Camera switch

NOTICE

●People and other three-dimen-

sional obstacles may appear

differently when displayed on

the panoramic view monitor.

(These differences include,

among others, cases in which

displayed objects appear to

have fallen over, disappear near

image processing areas, appear

from image processing areas,

or when the actual distance to

an object differs from the dis-

played position.)

The camera switch is located as

shown in the illustration.

●When the back door, which is

equipped with the back camera,

or front doors, which are

equipped with door mirrors that

have built-in side cameras, are

open, images will not be dis-

played properly on the pan-

oramic view monitor.

4

●The vehicle icon displayed in

panoramic view/moving

view/see-through view is a com-

puter generated image. Accord-

ingly, properties such as the

color, shape and size will differ

from the actual vehicle. For this

reason, nearby three-dimen-

sional objects may appear to be

touching the vehicle, and actual

distances to three-dimensional

objects may differ from those

displayed.

366

Menu button

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The screens which are displayed from the following buttons can be

selected. Also, the display can be changed to various screens from

button combinations.

The button display changes due to the situation of the vehicle, such

as the screen and speed being displayed, shift position, vehicle

equipment, etc.

The menu button is displayed when the shift lever is in D, N or R.

Front view button

Front split view button

Panoramic view on/off button

Guide line select button (P.372, 377)

Auto mode on/off button (P.374)

Multi-terrain Monitor on/off button^*(P.399)

Rear camera washer switch

Press shortly: The rear camera washer operates for a certain period of

time.

Press and hold: The rear camera washer operates while the rear camera

washer switch remains pressed.

Center guide line on/off button (P.377)

Rear split view button

Rear view button

3D view button

*

: If equipped

367

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Display

Checking around the vehi-

cle

When the shift lever is in P.

 Moving view

Press

.

Checking the front and

around the vehicle

When the shift lever is in a posi-

tion other than P.

 Panoramic view & front view

4

Select the front view button and

then turn ON the panoramic

view button.

 See-through view

Press

.

 Wide front view

Select the front view button and

then turn OFF the panoramic

view button.

 3D view

Press

.

368

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Front split view

Select the front split view button.

 Rear split view

Select the rear split view button.

Checking the rear and

around the vehicle

When the shift lever is in a posi-

tion other than P.

 Panoramic view & rear view

Select the rear view button and

then turn ON the panoramic

view button.

Checking around the

vehicle

The moving view screen and the

see-through view screen pro-

vide support when checking the

areas of around the vehicle

while parking. These screens

display an image of the vicinity

of the vehicle combined from the

4 cameras. The screen will dis-

play a 360° view around the

vehicle from either inside the

vehicle or from a birds-eye view

at an angle.

 Wide rear view

Select the rear view button and

then turn OFF the panoramic

view button.

To display the moving view/see-

through view screen, press

when the shift lever is in P and

the intuitive parking assist is

369

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 3D view

enabled.

Screen display

The 3D view provides support

when checking the areas in

around the vehicle perimeter in

confined areas.

 Moving view

The display position of the 3D

view can be changed by press-

ing the six different camera

angle switches.

To display the 3D view, select

the 3D view button (P.366)

after pressing

P range.

except in the

 See-through view

4

Display mode switching but-

ton

Zoom button

Camera angle SW

Select to change the display mode

between the moving view and the

see-through view.

The display position of the 3D view

can be changed

Rotation pause switch

●Pressing

on the screen or

Select to pause the rotation of the

screen.

again changes the screen back to

the previously displayed screen,

such as the navigation screen.

To resume rotation, select

.

Body color setting switch

Select to display the body color set-

ting screen and change the color of

the vehicle displayed on the pan-

oramic view monitor. (P.383)

370

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Checking the front and around the vehicle

The panoramic view & front view/wide front view/front split view

screen provides support when checking the areas in front of the

vehicle and around the vehicle when taking-off at T-intersections or

other intersections during poor visibility.

To display the screen, press

when the shift lever is in D or N with

the vehicle moving approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

This screen will be displayed if the intuitive parking assist detects an

object in front of your vehicle (intuitive parking assist linked display).

Screen display

Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode

will change as follows:

 Panoramic view & front view

Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Estimated course lines

Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.

• This line will be displayed when the steering wheel is turned by 90° or

more from the center (straight-line) position.

Guide line switching button

Select to change the guide line mode between the distance guide line mode

and the estimated course line mode. (P.372)

371

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Automatic display button

Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. (P.374)

Display mode switching buttons

The display can be changed to various screens from button combinations.

 Wide front view

4

Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Automatic display button

Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. (P.374)

Display mode switching buttons

The display can be changed to various screens from button combinations.

 Front split view

Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

• Split view: Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the edge of

372

4-5. Using the driving support systems

the bumper.

• Panoramic view: Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of

the bumper.

Vehicle width guide lines

Shows guide lines of the vehicle’s width including the outside rear view mir-

rors.

Zoom button

The front split view, which is currently displayed, can be magnified.

Front tire guide lines

Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the ground.

Automatic display button

Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. (P.374)

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

●Pressing

on the screen or

changes the screen to the previously

displayed screen, such as the navigation screen.

●For details about the intuitive parking assist (P.323).

●The display position of the intuitive parking assist and the position of

obstacles displayed in the camera image do not match.

WARNING

●When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-

nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area

around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until

safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

●As the intuitive parking assist display is displayed over the camera view,

it may be difficult to see the intuitive parking assist display depending on

the color and brightness of the surrounding area.

Switching the guide line

mode (panoramic view &

front view mode)

Each time the guide line switch-

ing button is selected, the mode

will change as follows:

373

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Distance guide line

 Only the distance guide lines

are displayed.

 Estimated course line

4

 Check the positions and dis-

tance between the vehicle

width guide line and a target

object such as the obstacle or

curb of the road.

 Estimated course lines will be

added to the distance guide

lines.

Using the vehicle width

guide line (front split view

mode)

The front split view screen dis-

plays images from the cameras

installed on each outside rear

view mirror. This screen is

designed to support the driver in

safe driving in situations such as

when driving on a narrow road,

by allowing them to check the

areas around the sides of the

vehicle.

374

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Pull over to the curb as shown

in the illustration above, tak-

ing care not to let the vehicle

width guide line overlap the

target object.

automatically in response to

vehicle speed.

Each time

is selected, auto-

matic display mode is

enabled/disabled.

 Ensure that the vehicle width

guide line is parallel to the tar-

get object.

In automatic display mode, the

monitor will automatically dis-

play images in the following situ-

ations:

Automatic display mode

 When the shift lever is shifted

to D or N.

In addition to screen switching

by operating

, automatic dis-

 When vehicle speed is

reduced to approximately 10

mph (16 km/h) or less.

play mode is available. In this

mode, the screen is switched

Checking the rear and around the vehicle

The panoramic view & rear view/wide rear view/rear split view

screen provide support when checking the areas of behind the vehi-

cle and around the vehicle while backing up, for example while park-

ing.

The screens will be displayed when the shift lever is in R.

Screen display

Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode

will change as follows:

 Panoramic view & rear view

Intuitive parking assist

375

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert/Rear Camera Detection

When a sensor detects an obstacle or pedestrian, the direction of obstacle

or pedestrian is displayed and the buzzer sounds.

RCD (Rear Camera Detection)

When the rear camera detects a pedestrian to the rear.

Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line mode. (P.377)

Display mode switching buttons

The display can be changed to various screens from button combinations.

Center guide line on/off button

Select to on/off the center guide line. (P.377)

 Wide rear view

4

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert/Rear Camera Detection

When a sensor detects an obstacle or pedestrian, the direction of obstacle

or pedestrian is displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line mode. (P.377)

Display mode switching buttons

The display can be changed to various screens from button combinations.

Center guide line on/off button

Select to on/off the center guide line. (P.377)

376

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Zoom button

Each time press the button, the mode will change between the wide rear

view mode, narrow rear view mode and hitch view mode. (P.380)

RCD (Rear Camera Detection)

When the rear camera detects a pedestrian to the rear.

 Rear split view

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert/Rear Camera Detection

When a sensor detects an obstacle or pedestrian, the direction of obstacle

or pedestrian is displayed and the buzzer sounds.

RCD (Rear Camera Detection)

When the rear camera detects a pedestrian to the rear.

Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line mode. (P.377)

Camera angle adjustment (P.380)

Zoom button (P.380)

●The monitor is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any position

other than R.

●For details about the intuitive parking assist (P.323), Rear Cross Traffic

Alert function (P.330) and rear camera detection. (P.335)

●The display position of the intuitive parking assist and the position of

obstacles displayed in the camera image do not match.

377

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

●When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-

nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area

around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until

safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

●As the intuitive parking assist display and Rear Cross Traffic Alert dis-

play are displayed over the camera view, it may be difficult to see the

intuitive parking assist display and Rear Cross Traffic Alert display

depending on the color and brightness of the surrounding area.

Guide lines displayed on the screen

Each time the guide line switching button is selected, the mode will

change as follows:

 Estimated course line

Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with

the operation of the steering wheel.

4

Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

Estimated course lines

Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.

Distance guide lines

Shows the distance behind the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned.

• The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated course lines.

• The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) and

approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the center of the edge of the

bumper.

Distance guide line

Shows the distance behind the vehicle.

378

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the edge of the

bumper.

Vehicle width guide lines

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

 Parking assist guide line

The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are dis-

played.

This mode is recommended for those who are comfortable with park-

ing the vehicle without the aid of the estimated course lines.

Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

Distance guide line

Shows the distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the

bumper.

Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

Vehicle width guide lines

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

Parking assist guide lines

Shows the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle.

 Distance guide line

Only distance guide line is displayed.

This mode is recommended for those who are comfortable with park-

379

4-5. Using the driving support systems

ing the vehicle without the aid of the guide lines.

Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

Distance guide line

Shows the distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the

bumper.

4

 Center guide line

When the display is turned ON, the center guide line simultaneously

displays the each of the guide lines for the estimated course line,

parking assist guide line or distance guide line.

Vehicle center line is displayed which move in accordance with the

operation of the steering wheel.

Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

●The display position of the intuitive parking assist and the position of

obstacles displayed in the camera image do not match.

380

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

●Depending on the circumstances of the vehicle (number of passengers,

amount of luggage, etc.), the position of the guide lines displayed on the

screen may change. Be sure to check visually around the vehicle before

proceeding.

●If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the

estimated course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected

by your Toyota dealer.

●Do not use the system if the display is incorrect due to an uneven (hilly)

road or a non-straight (curvy) road.

Changing the rear view mode

Each time press the zoom button, the mode will change as follows:

Wide rear view

Narrow rear view

Hitch zoom view

●The hitch zoom view can be displayed for a certain time when

is

pressed while the driving at speeds of 10 mph (16 km/h) or more.

●The hitch zoom view can be switched when the switch is pressed while

the displaying the screen.

Using the rear split view

If towing a trailer, magnify the difficult to see section of the vehicle

rear or change the screen display and use when checking.

381

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Zoom button

The rear split view, which is currently displayed, can be magnified.

Camera angle adjustment button

The direction of the camera can be changed from left to right in 5 stages.

lines are within the parking

space, and back up slowly.

Parking

4

Using the estimated course

line

When parking in a space which

is in the reverse direction to the

space described in the proce-

dure below, the steering direc-

tions will be reversed.

1 Shift the shift lever to R.

2 Turn the steering wheel so

that the estimated course

Parking space

Estimated course lines

3 When the rear position of the

vehicle has entered the park-

ing space, turn the steering

wheel so that the vehicle

382

4-5. Using the driving support systems

width guide lines are within

the left and right dividing lines

of the parking space.

1 Shift the shift lever to R.

2 Back up until the parking

assist guide line meets the

edge of the dividing line of

the parking space.

Vehicle width guide line

4 Once the vehicle width guide

lines and the parking space

lines are parallel, straighten

the steering wheel and back

up slowly until the vehicle

has completely entered the

parking space.

Parking assist guide line

3 Turn the steering wheel all

the way to the left, and back

up slowly.

4 Once the vehicle is parallel

with the parking space,

5 Stop the vehicle in an appro-

priate place, and finish park-

ing.

straighten the steering wheel

and back up slowly until the

vehicle has completely

entered the parking space.

Using parking assist guide

line

5 Stop the vehicle in an appro-

priate place, and finish park-

ing.

When parking in a space which

is in the reverse direction to the

space described in the proce-

dure below, the steering direc-

tions will be reversed.

383

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• The intuitive parking assist is

available.

Magnifying function

●In the following situations, the

magnified display will be can-

celed automatically:

• The vehicle speed is approxi-

mately 10 mph (16 km/h) or

higher.

If displayed objects are too

small to see clearly when the

panoramic view is displayed, the

area around any of the 4 cor-

ners of the vehicle can be mag-

nified.

• The intuitive parking assist is

unavailable.

●When the display is magnified, the

guide lines will not be displayed.

Magnifying the display

Customizing the pan-

oramic view monitor

1 Turn the intuitive parking

assist on.

2 Select the area on the pan-

oramic view display you wish

to magnify.

The color of the vehicle dis-

played on the panoramic view

monitor can be changed.

4

Changing the body color

displayed in the pan-

oramic view monitor

1 Display the moving view/see-

through view/3D view screen.

(P.368)

2 Select

.

 Touching one of the 4 areas

within the dotted lines will

magnify that area. (Dotted

lines are not displayed on the

actual display.)

3 Select the desired color.

 To return to the normal view,

touch the panoramic view dis-

play again.

●The magnifying function is

enabled when all of the following

conditions are met:

• The panoramic view & front view

or the panoramic view & rear view

is displayed.

• The vehicle speed is below

approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

384

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Panoramic view monitor precautions

Area displayed on screen

Area of image of panoramic view

The panoramic view monitor displays an image of the surrounding

view of the vehicle.

Since the panoramic view processes and displays images based on

flat road surfaces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension

objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher

than the surface of the road. Even if there is room between the bum-

pers of the vehicles and it seems not likely to collide in the image, in

reality, the both vehicles are on a collision course.

Check the safety of the surroundings directly.

Objects located in the shaded areas will not be displayed on the

screen.

Parts of objects which extend above a certain height cannot be

displayed on the screen.

●As the images obtained from four cameras are processed and displayed

385

4-5. Using the driving support systems

on the standard of a flat road surface; the panoramic view/moving

view/see through view may be displayed as follows.

• Objects may look collapsed; thinner or bigger than usual.

• An object with a higher position than the road surface may look farther

away than it actually is or may not appear at all.

• Tall objects may appear protruding from the non-displayed areas of the

image.

●Variations in the brightness of the image may appear for every camera.

●The displayed image may be shifted by inclination of the vehicle body,

change in vehicle height, etc., depending on the number of passengers,

amount of luggage, fuel quantity, etc.

●If the front doors or back door are not completely closed; neither the

image nor the guide lines are displayed.

●The position relations of the vehicle icon and the road surface or obstacle

may differ from the actual positions.

●The black areas of the vicinity of the vehicle icon are areas that are not

captured by the camera.

●Images like the following are combined, thus some areas may be difficult

to view.

4

WARNING

When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates

in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around

the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has

been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

386

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Panoramic view & rear view

Area of the image captured

by the camera

 Panoramic view & front view

The area around both cor-

ners of the bumper will not be

displayed.

 Front split view

 Wide rear view

The area around both cor-

387

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Hitch zoom view

ners of the bumper will not be

displayed.

 Rear split view

4

The area able to be seen changes

depending on the camera angle

adjustments.

●The area covered by the camera

is limited. Objects which are close

to either corner of the bumper or

under the bumper cannot be seen

on the screen.

When the camera angle is in

the middle (Left: 50%/Right:

50%)

●The area displayed on the screen

may vary depending on vehicle

orientation or road conditions.

When the camera angle is at

the MAX on the left side (Left:

100%)

●The camera uses a special lens.

The distance in the image dis-

played on the screen will differ

from the actual distance.

●In the rear split view, there is a

blind spot due to the size (length

and height) of the trailer.

●In the hitch zoom view, if a backlit

license plate is equipped it may be

reflected in the screen.

The camera

The cameras for the panoramic

view monitor are located as

shown in the illustrations.

388

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Front camera

 Side cameras

 Rear camera

Rear camera: Dirt on the cam-

era lens can be cleaned by

operating the dedicated camera

cleaning washer. (P.243)

NOTICE

●The panoramic view monitor

may not operate properly in the

following cases.

• If the camera is hit, the position

and mounting angle of the cam-

era may change.

• As the camera has a water

proof construction, do not

detach, disassemble or modify

it. This may cause incorrect

operation.

• When cleaning the camera lens,

flush the camera with a large

quantity of water and wipe it

with a soft and wet cloth.

Strongly rubbing the camera

lens may cause the camera lens

to be scratched and unable to

transmit a clear image.

• Do not allow an organic solvent,

car wax, window cleaner or a

glass coating to adhere to the

camera. If this happens, wipe it

off as soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rap-

idly, such as when hot water is

poured on the vehicle in cold

weather, the system may not

operate normally.

Using the camera

• When washing the vehicle, do

not apply intensive bursts of

water to the camera or camera

area. Doing so may result in the

camera malfunctioning.

If dirt or foreign matter (such as

water droplets, snow, mud, etc.)

is adhering to the camera, it

cannot transmit a clear image.

In this case, flush it with a large

quantity of water and wipe the

camera lens clean with a soft

and wet cloth.

●Do not expose the camera to

strong impacts as this could

cause a malfunction. If this hap-

pens, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

389

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●When the washer fluid reservoir

is empty, do not operate the

switch continually as the washer

fluid pump may overheat.

Cleaning the rear camera

with washer fluid

Dirt on the rear camera lens can

be cleaned by operating the

dedicated camera cleaning

washer.

●When a nozzle becomes

blocked, contact your Toyota

dealer. Do not try to clear it with

a pin or other object. The nozzle

would be damaged.

 When cleaning the camera, it

may be difficult to see the

image due to the washer fluid.

When backing up, be sure to

visually check all around the

vehicle both directly and using

the mirrors before proceed-

ing.

●Some foreign matters may not

be removed completely after

cleaning. In this case, rinse the

rear camera lens with a large

quantity of water and then wipe

it clean with a soft cloth damp-

ened with water. Do not strongly

rub the rear camera lens, as it

may be scratched and will not

be able to transmit a clear

image.

4

 If washer fluid remains on the

camera lens surface after

cleaning, the image may be

difficult to see at night due to

the height or inclination of the

headlights of the vehicle

behind.

●Washer fluid is sprayed onto the

rear camera lens surface.

Therefore, the ice, snow, etc.

adhering around the rear cam-

era such as the garnish cannot

be removed.

●Use fluids that are appropriate

to the outside temperatures, in

order to prevent the washer fluid

from freezing.

 Some dirts may not be

removed completely after

cleaning. In this case, rinse

the camera lens with a large

quantity of water and then

wipe it clean with a soft cloth

dampened with water.

●When washing the vehicle, do

not let water from the high-pres-

sure washer directly hit the noz-

zle. Due to the shock from the

high pressure water, it is possi-

ble that the device may not

operate normally. Also, the

water may enter the nozzle

injection opening and freeze. It

causes the washer fluid not to

spray properly.

 Washer fluid is sprayed onto

the camera lens surface.

Therefore, the ice, snow, etc.

adhering around the camera

cannot be removed.

●Do not subject the nozzle to

sudden change of temperature

such as by pouring hot water

into the nozzle under the cold

weather.

NOTICE

●If there is a sufficient amount of

washer fluid but it does not

spray out, check that the

washer nozzle is not blocked.

390

4-5. Using the driving support systems

may not actually be parallel

NOTICE

with the dividing lines of the

parking space, even when

they appear to be so. Be sure

to check visually.

●The washer fluid will need to be

replaced more often when the

rear camera cleaner system is

frequently used. Because the

washer reservoir is shared with

the windshield washer.

 The distances between the

vehicle width guide lines and

the left and right dividing lines

of the parking space may not

be equal, even when they

appear to be so. Be sure to

check visually.

●Do not strike or hit the nozzle or

subject it to a strong impact, as

the nozzle installation position

and angle may be changed.

●When the vehicle got strong

vibration, it may be difficult to

see the image due to the

washer fluid drop from the noz-

zle.

 The distance guide lines give

a distance guide for flat road

surfaces. In any of the follow-

ing situations, there is a mar-

gin of error between the guide

lines on the screen and the

actual distance/course on the

road.

●The display screen and place-

ment position of the washer

switch may differ depending on

the type of screen and system.

●When the washer switch is

pressed and held, washer fluid

is sprayed while the switch is

pressed.

●When activate rear camera

washer, it also activate rear win-

dows shield washer simultane-

ously.

When the ground behind the

vehicle slopes up sharply

The distance guidelines are pro-

jected on a horizontal surface,

distances on an upward sloping

surface appear farther from the

vehicle than the actual distance.

Because of this, objects will

appear to be farther away than

they actually are. In the same

way, there will be a margin of

error between the guidelines

and the actual distance/course

on the road.

●When cleaning the rear camera,

it may be difficult to see the

image due to the washer fluid.

In this case, directly check the

surroundings of the vehicle.

●If washer fluid remains on the

rear camera lens surface after

cleaning. Then the image may

be difficult to see at night due to

the height or inclination of the

headlights of the vehicle behind.

Difference between the

screen and the actual road

 The distance guide lines and

the vehicle width guide lines

391

4-5. Using the driving support systems

4

When the ground behind the

vehicle slopes down sharply

When any part of the vehicle

sags

The distance guidelines are pro-

jected on a horizontal surface,

distances on an downward slop-

ing surface appear closer to the

vehicle than the actual distance.

Because of this, objects will

appear to be closer than they

actually are. In the same way,

there will be a margin of error

between the guidelines and the

actual distance/course on the

road.

When the vehicle posture tilts

due to the number of passen-

gers or the distribution of the

load, there is a margin of error

between the guide lines on the

screen and the actual dis-

tance/course on the road.

A margin of error

392

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Distortion of three-dimensional objects on the screen

When there are three-dimensional objects (such as vehicle bum-

pers, etc.) nearby in positions higher than the surface of the road,

take extra care when using the following.

Panoramic view display (including magnified display)

Since the panoramic view processes and displays images based on

flat road surfaces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension

objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher

than the surface of the road. For example, even though it appears

that there is space between the bumpers of the two vehicles in the

illustration below and they are not likely to collide, in reality, a colli-

sion is about to occur.

WARNING

When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates

in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around

the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has

been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

When approaching three-dimensional objects

The estimated course lines target flat surfaced objects (such as the

road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimen-

sional objects (such as vehicles) using the estimated course lines

and distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional

object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be care-

393

4-5. Using the driving support systems

ful of the following.

WARNING

When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates

in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around

the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has

been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

(such as the overhang of a wall

or loading platform of a truck) in

Estimated course lines

Since the estimated course line

is displayed for a flat road sur-

face, it cannot depict the posi-

tion of three-dimensional objects

(such as vehicle bumpers, etc.)

that are in positions higher than

the surface of the road. Even if

the bumpers of the vehicle is on

the outside of the estimated

course line in the image, in real-

ity, the vehicles are on a colli-

sion course.

high positions may not be pro-

jected on the screen. Check the

safety of the surroundings

directly.

4

The pillar that is diagonal to the

parking spot may be displayed

perpendicular on the screen.

Even if it seems like there will

not be a collision, the pillar is

diagonal, so there may be colli-

sion with the upper part of the

pillar.

Estimated course line

Check the safety of the sur-

roundings directly.

Three-dimensional objects

394

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Visually check the surroundings

and the area behind the vehicle.

In the case shown below, the

truck appears to be outside of

the estimated course lines and

the vehicle does not look as if it

hits the truck. However, the rear

body of the truck may actually

cross over the estimated course

lines. In reality if you back up as

guided by the estimated course

lines, the vehicle may hit the

truck.

Estimated course lines

Distance guide lines

Visually check the surroundings

and the area behind the vehicle.

On the screen, it appears that a

truck is parking at point

.

However, in reality if you back

up to point , you will hit the

truck. On the screen, it appears

that

is closest and

is far-

thest away. However, in reality,

the distance to

and

is the

same, and

is farther than

and

.

395

4-5. Using the driving support systems

4

396

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Things you should know

If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause

and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Symptom

Likely cause

Solution

 The vehicle is in a

dark area

 The temperature

around the lens is

either high or low

Back up while visually

checking the vehicle’s

surroundings. (Use the

 The outside tempera- monitor again once con-

ture is low ditions have been

 There are water drop- improved.)

lets on the camera The procedure for

The image is difficult to  It is raining or humid adjusting the picture

see

 Foreign matter (mud, quality of the pan-

etc.) is adhering to the oramic view monitor

camera

system is the same as

 Sunlight or headlights the procedure for

are shining directly

into the camera

adjusting the screen dis-

play. (Refer to the

 The vehicle is under “MULTIMEDIA

fluorescent lights,

sodium lights, mer-

cury lights, etc.

OWNER’S MANUAL”.)

Flush the camera with a

large quantity of water

and wipe the camera

lens clean with a soft

and wet cloth.

Dirt or foreign matter

(such as water drop-

lets, snow, mud, etc.) is

adhering to the camera.

The image is blurry

Operate the dedicated

camera cleaning

washer and clean the

camera lens. (P.243)

397

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Symptom

Likely cause

Solution

The camera or sur-

rounding area has

received a strong

impact.

Have the vehicle

inspected by your Toy-

ota dealer.

The image is out of

alignment

Have the vehicle

inspected by your Toy-

ota dealer.

The camera position is

out of alignment.

 The vehicle is tilted.

If this happens due to

The guide lines are very

far out of alignment

(There is a heavy load these causes, it does

on the vehicle, tire not indicate a malfunc-

pressure is low due to tion.

a tire puncture, etc.) Back up while visually

 The vehicle is used on checking the vehicle’s

an incline.

surroundings.

4

The estimated course There is a malfunction

lines move even though in the signals being out-

Have the vehicle

inspected by your Toy-

ota dealer.

the steering wheel is

straight

put by the steering sen-

sor.

Close the back door.

If this does not resolve

The back door is open. the symptom, have the

vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

Guide lines are not dis-

played

 Battery has been rein-

stalled.

 The steering wheel

has been moved while

the battery was being

reinstalled.

Have the vehicle

 Battery power is low. inspected by your Toy-

 The steering sensor ota dealer.

has been reinstalled.

is displayed

 There is a malfunction

in the signals being

output by the steering

sensor.

398

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Symptom

Likely cause

Solution

The panoramic view dis-

play cannot be magni-

fied

Follow the correction

procedures for malfunc-

tions of the intuitive

The intuitive parking

assist may be malfunc-

tioning or dirty.

The see-through

view/moving view can-

not be displayed

parking assist. (P.323)

When the washer fluid

reservoir is empty.

Replenish washer fluid.

Have the vehicle

inspected by your Toy-

ota dealer.

When a nozzle

becomes blocked.

Use washer fluids that

are appropriate to the

outside temperatures.

When washer fluid is

frozen.

Washer fluid dose not

spray out.

The back door is open. Close the back door.

Washer fluid is not filled

into the washer path

Operate the rear cam-

hose due to no opera- era washer several

tion for an extended

period of time.

times.

Foreign matters (such Rinse the camera with a

as water droplets, mud, large quantity of water,

snow and snow melting wipe it clean with a soft

agents.) is on the cam- cloth dampened with

era lens.

water.

Rear camera image is

difficult to see.

Foreign matters (such

as Ice, snow and mud)

is attached to surround-

ing parts of the camera

lens.

Remove foreign mat-

ters.

The panoramic view

monitor is malfunction- inspected by your Toy-

ing. ota dealer.

Have the vehicle

The washer switch does

not respond.

399

4-5. Using the driving support systems

*

●Do not drive while only looking

at the screen. When driving,

make sure to directly confirm

the safety of your surroundings,

such as by visually checking the

area and using the vehicle’s

mirrors.

Multi-terrain Monitor

*

: If equipped

The Multi-terrain Monitor

helps the driver to check the

vehicle surroundings. It

assists in determining the

conditions around the

driver in a variety of situa-

tions, such as when judging

conditions during off-road

driving or checking for

●In low temperatures, the screen

may darken or the images may

become faint. Images of moving

objects in particular may distort

or disappear from the screen.

Therefore, make sure to drive

carefully while directly visually

confirming the safety of your

surroundings.

obstacles when parking.

WARNING

Camera switch

4

Observe the following precautions

to avoid an accident that could

result in death or serious injuries.

The camera switch is located as

shown in the illustration.

■When using the Multi-terrain

Monitor system

●Never rely solely on the Multi-

terrain Monitor. As with

unequipped vehicles, drive

carefully while directly confirm-

ing the safety of your surround-

ings and the area to the rear of

the vehicle. Take particular care

to avoid parked cars and other

obstacles.

●Due to the characteristics of the

camera lens, the actual position

and distance of people and

other obstacles will differ from

those shown on the Multi-terrain

Monitor screen. Directly con-

firm the safety of your surround-

ings before driving.

When the outer mirrors are not

positioned in normal position,

images will not be displayed

properly on the panoramic view

monitor.

●The Multi-terrain Monitor is dis-

played by operating

when

vehicle speed is approximately 10

mph (16 km/h) or less. If the vehi-

cle speed exceeds approximately

10 mph (16 km/h), the Multi-ter-

rain Monitor display is canceled.

400

Menu button

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The screens that are displayed can be selected by the following but-

tons.

Front view & dual side view

Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view

Rear view & dual side view

Wide rear view

Auto mode on/off button (P.402)

Multi-terrain Monitor on/off button

Panoramic View Monitor is displayed when the Multi-terrain Monitor is

turned OFF. (P.363)

Rear camera washer switch

Press shortly: The rear camera washer operates for a certain period of

time.

Press and hold: The rear camera washer operates while the rear camera

washer switch remains pressed.

 The driver can drive while

confirming the following

guidelines with a front view

When the front-wheel

drive control switch is in

“4L” or “4H” (part-time

4WD), “L4L” or “H4L”

(full-time 4WD) and Multi-

terrain select is ON

• Distance with the obstacle in the

front

• Estimated course line

 The driver can drive while

The Multi-terrain Monitor is dis-

play a screen suitable for off-

road.

confirming the obstacle in the

flank of tire neighborhood and

the vehicle with a side screen

401

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Under vehicle terrain view &

dual side view (front magni-

fied)

Checking the area to the

front and sides of the vehi-

cle

 Front view & dual side view

Select the front view & dual side

view button.

When the under vehicle terrain

view and side view screens are

touched, each of the display sizes

can be changed.

4

When the front view and side view

screens are touched, each of the

display sizes can be changed.

Checking the area to the

rear of the vehicle

 Rear view & dual side view

Checking the condition of

the road surface under the

vehicle

Select the rear view & dual side

view button.

 Under vehicle terrain view &

dual side view

Select the under vehicle terrain

view & dual side view button.

402

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Wide rear view

displayed. (P.363)

Select the wide rear view button.

Automatic display mode

When automatic display mode is

turned on, the Multi-terrain Mon-

itor screen is displayed in the

following conditions, even if

has not been operated.

• When the shift lever is shifted

to D or N.

The rear view & dual side view

and the wide rear displays can

be switched by touching the

screen.

• When vehicle speed is

reduced to approximately 10

mph (16 km/h) or less.

●The automatic display mode

switches between on and off each

When the front-wheel

drive control switch is in

“2H” or “4H” (part-time

4WD), “H4F” or “H4L”

(full-time 4WD) and Multi-

terrain select is OFF

time

is selected. When auto-

matic display mode is on, an indi-

cator illuminates on the icon.

●Even when automatic display

mode is on, the display can still be

switched by pressing

.

The panoramic view monitor is

Screen display and functions

The front-wheel drive control switch in the case of “4L” or “4H” (part-

time 4WD), “L4L” or “H4L” (full-time 4WD) and Multi-terrain select is

ON, the Multi-terrain Monitor can display a screen suitable for off-

road.

Front view & dual side view

Front view & dual side view can be used to check the area around

the front of the vehicle.

 In addition to an image of the front of the vehicle, guide lines are

displayed in a composite view to provide reference for when

deciding a direction to move forward in.

 If the steering wheel is turned 270° or more, guide lines and other

403

4-5. Using the driving support systems

features to support turning are automatically displayed.

Front view & dual side view button

4

Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view button (P.405)

Clinometer

Displays the vehicle’s estimated degree of incline. (P.404)

Automatic display button

Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. (P.402)

Vehicle width lines (blue)

Shows guide lines of the vehicle’s width including the outside rear view mir-

rors.

1.5 ft. (0.5 m) distance guide line (red)

Show distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the edge of the bumper.

3 ft. (1 m) distance guide line (blue)

6 ft. (2 m) distance guide line (blue)

Front tire course line (yellow)

Shows the estimated course of the front tires according to steering wheel

position.

Forward movement guide line (blue)

Shows the estimated tire course of the tightest possible turn.

Front tire contact line (blue)

Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the ground.

404

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Rear tire contact line (blue)

Shows guide lines of where the rear tire touches the ground.

Rear tire course line (yellow)

Shows the estimated course of the rear tires.

When the steering wheel is turned by 270° or more

Intuitive parking assist/slip display

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds or indicates a

tire slippage. (P.405)

●The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in a position other

than P.

●When the intuitive parking assist detects an obstacle or another vehicle, a

warning message pops up in the clinometer/slip display area.

Clinometer

Clinometer displays the vehicle inclination to the front, rear, left and

right within a range of 0° to approximately 30°.

Degree markers of incline to the front and rear

Indicates the vehicle inclination in degrees in the front and rear directions.

Degree markers of incline to the left and right

Indicates the vehicle inclination in degrees in the left and right directions.

Pointer

Indicates the degree of the vehicle inclination in comparison to a parallel

line.

●The display indicates the incline of the vehicle in degrees shown by the

movement of the pointer and the rotation of the vehicle image.

●The color of the degree markers of incline to the front, rear, left and right

405

4-5. Using the driving support systems

changes according to the current incline of the vehicle.

●After the engine switch is in ON, the degree of incline is not displayed until

such information is determined.

●The degree of incline showed on the clinometer is only an approximate

indication, and may differ from the degree of incline measured using other

equipment.

Tire display

Slip display

Indicates the position of freely spin-

ning tires in yellow if the tire spins.

(During Crawl Control is operating,

all of the tires are indicated in yel-

low.)

When tire slippage is detected,

the clinometer display area is

automatically switched to the

slip display.

Pop-up display of the intuitive

parking assist

Displayed if an obstacle is detected

while the intuitive parking assist is

turned on.

4

Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view

Lines indicating current vehicle and tire position are displayed in a

composite view on an image taken approximately 32 ft. (10 m)

behind the current vehicle position and assists the driver to check

conditions underneath the vehicle or determine the position of the

front tires.

Current vehicle position

Image displayed in the under vehicle terrain view (image taken

406

4-5. Using the driving support systems

approximately 32 ft. (10 m) behind the current vehicle position)

Vehicle position at the time the image was taken (approximately

32 ft. (10 m) behind the current vehicle position)

Displaying the under vehicle terrain view

 Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view

 Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view (front magnified)

Front view & dual side view button (P.402)

Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view button

Clinometer

Displays the vehicle’s estimated degree of incline. (P.404)

Automatic display button

Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. (P.402)

Tire position indicator lines (black or white)

Indicates the estimated position of the front tires.

Vehicle position indicator lines (blue)

Indicates the estimated position of the vehicle.

1.5 ft. (0.5 m) distance guide line (red or black)

407

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Show distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the edge of the bumper.

Front tire contact line (blue)

Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the ground.

Vehicle width lines (blue)

Shows guide lines of the vehicle’s width including the outside rear view mir-

rors.

Rear tire contact line (blue)

Shows guide lines of where the rear tire touches the ground.

Intuitive parking assist/slip icon

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds or indicates a

tire slippage. (P.405)

4

●The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in a position other

than P.

●In the following situations, the system may not operate normally, or it may

not be possible to switch to the under vehicle terrain view.

• The road is covered with snow

• It is nighttime and the road has no illumination

• Dirt or foreign matter is adhering to the camera lens

• There is water in front of the vehicle (a river, puddle, sea water, etc.)

WARNING

●The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may

differ from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passen-

gers, cargo weight, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of

the surrounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while con-

firming the safety of your surroundings.

●The image displayed is one that was previously taken at a point approx-

imately 32 ft. (10 m) behind the current vehicle position. In cases such

as when objects move after the image is taken, the image displayed on

the screen may differ from the actual state.

Rear view & dual side view/wide rear view

The rear view & dual side view/wide rear view screen provide sup-

port when checking the areas of behind the vehicle and around the

vehicle while backing up, for example while parking.

The screens will be displayed when the shift lever is in R.

408

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Rear view & dual side view

 Wide rear view

Rear view & dual side view

Wide rear view button

Clinometer/slip display

Displays the vehicle’s estimated degree of incline or indicates a tire slip-

page. (P.404, 405)

1.5 ft. (0.5 m) distance guide line (red)

Show distance in rear of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the edge of the bumper.

Vehicle width guide lines (blue)

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

Front tire contact line (blue)

Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the ground.

Rear tire contact line (blue)

Shows guide lines of where the rear tire touches the ground.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert/Rear Camera Detection

When a sensor detects a vehicle or pedestrian approaching from the rear,

the direction of the vehicle or pedestrian approaching from the rear is dis-

409

4-5. Using the driving support systems

played and the buzzer sounds.

Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Rear Camera Detection

When the rear camera detects a pedestrian approaching from the rear, the

direction of the vehicle approaching from the rear is displayed and the

buzzer sounds.

●The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in P.

●For details about the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function. (P.330)

●If the back door is not closed, guide lines will not be displayed. If the guide

lines do not display even when the back door is closed, have the vehicle

inspected at your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

4

The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may dif-

fer from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers,

cargo weight, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the sur-

rounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while confirming the

safety of your surroundings.

Cleaning the camera

NOTICE

■How to use the cameras

If dirt or foreign matter, such as

water droplets, snow, or mud,

has stuck to the camera, you will

not be able to see the image

clearly. If that happens, splash

the camera with a large amount

of water and then wipe the cam-

era lens clean with a soft, damp

cloth.

●The Multi-terrain Monitor may

stop functioning correctly. Take

note of the following items:

• Do not hit or apply a forceful

impact on the camera. Doing so

may change the position and

mounting angle of the camera.

• The camera is designed to be

waterproof. Do not detach, dis-

assemble, or modify it.

Rear camera: Dirt on the cam-

era lens can be cleaned by

operating the dedicated camera

cleaning washer. (P.243)

• When washing the camera lens,

splash the camera with a large

amount of water and then wipe

the camera lens clean with a

soft, damp cloth. Rubbing the

camera lens forcibly may

scratch the camera lens and

you may no longer be able to

see images clearly.

410

4-5. Using the driving support systems

difficult to see at night due to

NOTICE

the height or inclination of the

headlights of the vehicle

behind.

• The camera cover is made of

resin. Do not allow an organic

solvent, car wax, window

cleaner, or glass coating to

adhere to the camera. If this

happens, wipe it off immedi-

ately.

 Some dirts may not be

removed completely after

cleaning. In this case, rinse

the camera lens with a large

quantity of water and then

wipe it clean with a soft cloth

dampened with water.

• Do not pour hot water on the

vehicle in cold weather or apply

other rapid changes of tempera-

ture.

• If you wash the vehicle with a

high pressure car washer, do

not point the hose directly at the

camera or camera area. Apply-

ing strong water pressure may

result in the camera malfunc-

tioning.

 Washer fluid is sprayed onto

the camera lens surface.

Therefore, the ice, snow, etc.

adhering around the camera

cannot be removed.

●If the camera is hit, it may cause

a camera malfunction. If this

happens, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

NOTICE

●If there is a sufficient amount of

washer fluid but it does not

spray out, check that the

washer nozzle is not blocked.

Cleaning the rear camera

with washer fluid

●When the washer fluid reservoir

is empty, do not operate the

switch continually as the washer

fluid pump may overheat.

Dirt on the rear camera lens can

be cleaned by operating the

dedicated camera cleaning

washer.

●When a nozzle becomes

blocked, contact your Toyota

dealer. Do not try to clear it with

a pin or other object. The nozzle

would be damaged.

 When cleaning the camera, it

may be difficult to see the

image due to the washer fluid.

When backing up, be sure to

visually check all around the

vehicle both directly and using

the mirrors before proceed-

ing.

●Some foreign matters may not

be removed completely after

cleaning. In this case, rinse the

rear camera lens with a large

quantity of water and then wipe

it clean with a soft cloth damp-

ened with water. Do not strongly

rub the rear camera lens, as it

may be scratched and will not

be able to transmit a clear

image.

 If washer fluid remains on the

camera lens surface after

cleaning, the image may be

411

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●When the washer switch is

NOTICE

pressed and held, washer fluid

is sprayed while the switch is

pressed.

●Washer fluid is sprayed onto the

rear camera lens surface.

Therefore, the ice, snow, etc.

adhering around the rear cam-

era such as the garnish cannot

be removed.

●When activate rear camera

washer, it also activate rear win-

dows shield washer simultane-

ously.

●Use fluids that are appropriate

to the outside temperatures, in

order to prevent the washer fluid

from freezing.

●When cleaning the rear camera,

it may be difficult to see the

image due to the washer fluid.

In this case, directly check the

surroundings of the vehicle.

●When washing the vehicle, do

not let water from the high-pres-

sure washer directly hit the noz-

zle. Due to the shock from the

high pressure water, it is possi-

ble that the device may not

operate normally. Also, the

water may enter the nozzle

injection opening and freeze. It

causes the washer fluid not to

spray properly.

●If washer fluid remains on the

rear camera lens surface after

cleaning. Then the image may

be difficult to see at night due to

the height or inclination of the

headlights of the vehicle behind.

4

Multi-terrain Monitor pre-

cautions

●Do not subject the nozzle to

sudden change of temperature

such as by pouring hot water

into the nozzle under the cold

weather.

P.384

Things you should know

●The washer fluid will need to be

replaced more often when the

rear camera cleaner system is

frequently used. Because the

washer reservoir is shared with

the windshield washer.

P.396

●Do not strike or hit the nozzle or

subject it to a strong impact, as

the nozzle installation position

and angle may be changed.

●When the vehicle got strong

vibration, it may be difficult to

see the image due to the

washer fluid drop from the noz-

zle.

●The display screen and place-

ment position of the washer

switch may differ depending on

the type of screen and system.

412

Driving m ode selec t

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Selecting the driving

mode

sw itch

1 Press the “DRIVE MODE”

switch.

The driving modes can be

selected to suit driving con-

dition.

System components

2 Select the driving modes on

the multi-information display

while turning the mode select

switch left and right.

“DRIVE MODE” switch

Mode select switch

Multi-information display

(P.91, 100)

Multi-information display

 Vehicles without Adaptive

Variable Suspension system

• “NORMAL” mode

Provides an optimal balance of fuel

economy, quietness, and dynamic

performance. Suitable for city driv-

ing.

413

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• “ECO” mode

example when driving on mountain

roads. The “SPORT S” indicator

comes on.

Helps the driver accelerate in an

eco-friendly manner and improve

fuel economy through moderate

throttle characteristics and by con-

trolling the operation of the air con-

ditioning system (heating/cooling).

The “ECO” indicator comes on.

• “SPORT S+” mode

Helps to ensure the controllability

and stability of the vehicle by inte-

grally controlling the steering wheel

and suspensions as well as the

transmission and engine, making it

suitable for sporty driving. The

“SPORT S+” indicator comes on.

• “SPORT” mode

Assists acceleration response by

controlling the transmission, engine

and steering. Suitable for when pre-

cise handling is desirable, for

example when driving on mountain

roads. The “SPORT” indicator

comes on.

• “CUSTOM” mode

Allows you to drive with the power-

train, chassis and air conditioning

system functions set to your pre-

ferred settings. Custom mode set-

tings can only be changed on the

drive mode customization display of

multimedia system. The “CUSTOM”

indicator comes on.

4

 Vehicles with Adaptive Vari-

able Suspension system

• “NORMAL” mode

Provides an optimal balance of fuel

economy, quietness, and dynamic

performance. Suitable for city driv-

ing.

■The driving mode select switch

can be operated when

 Vehicles with part-time 4WD

• “COMFORT” mode

The front-wheel drive control switch

is in “2H” and “4H”.

By controlling the suspension, rid-

ing comfort is further enhanced.

Suitable for city driving. The “COM-

FORT” indicator comes on.

 Vehicles with full-time 4WD

The front-wheel drive control switch

is in “H4F” and “H4L”.

• “ECO” mode

■Operation of the air condition-

ing system in Eco mode

Helps the driver accelerate in an

eco-friendly manner and improve

fuel economy through moderate

throttle characteristics and by con-

trolling the operation of the air con-

ditioning system (heating/cooling).

The “ECO” indicator comes on.

Eco mode controls the heating/cool-

ing operations and fan speed of the

air conditioning system to enhance

fuel efficiency. To improve air condi-

tioning performance, perform the

following operations:

●Adjust the fan speed (P.454,

461)

• “SPORT S” mode

●Turn off Eco drive mode (P.412)

■Automatic deactivation of driv-

ing modes:

Assists acceleration response by

controlling the transmission, engine

and steering. Suitable for when pre-

cise handling is desirable, for

Driving mode is deactivated or the

414

4-5. Using the driving support systems

driving mode will be changed to nor-

mal mode in the following condi-

tions:

Four-w heel drive sys-

tem (part-time 4WD

m odels)

*

●After turning the engine switch off

and then turning it to on

*

●Vehicles with part-time 4WD:

When the front-wheel drive control

switch is in “4L”

: If equipped

Use the front-wheel drive

control switch to select the

following transfer modes:

●Vehicles with full-time 4WD:

When the front-wheel drive control

switch is in “L4L”

●When the Multi-terrain Select is

turned on (if equipped)

Front-wheel drive control

switch

●When the Downhill assist control

system is turned on (if equipped)

●When the “TOW HAUL” mode is

turned on

■Customization

The Custom mode can be changed.

(Customizable features: P.652)

“2H” (high speed position,

two-wheel drive)

Use this for normal driving on dry

hard-surfaced roads. This position

gives greater economy, quietest

ride and least wear.

Hold down

select.

and turn the dial to

“4H” (high speed position,

four-wheel drive)

Use this for driving only on tracks

that permit the tires slide, like off-

road, icy or snow-covered roads.

This position provides greater trac-

415

4-5. Using the driving support systems

tion than two-wheel drive.

The “4HI” indicator will come on.

2 Shift the shift lever to N.

3 Push and turn the front-wheel

drive control switch to “4L”.

Hold down

select.

and turn the dial to

The “4LO” indicator will come on

and the “4HI” indicator go off.

“4L” (low speed position,

four-wheel drive)

■ Shifting from “4L” to “4H”

1 Stop the vehicle completely

and continue to depress the

brake pedal.

Use this for maximum power and

traction. Use “4L” for climbing or

descending steep hills, off-road

driving, and hard pulling in sand,

mud or deep snow.

2 Shift the shift lever to N.

3 Push and turn the front-wheel

drive control switch to “4H”.

The “4LO” indicator will come on.

Hold down

select.

and turn the dial to

The “4LO” indicator will go off and

the “4HI” indicator come on.

4

■When the front-wheel drive con-

trol switch is shifted to “4L”

Shifting between “2H”

and “4H”

VSC is automatically turned off.

■If the “4HI” indicator flashes

■ Shifting from “2H” to “4H”

The transfer mode may not suc-

cessfully change. Drive straight

ahead while accelerating or deceler-

ating, or drive in reverse.

1 Reduce vehicle speed to less

than 62 mph (100 km/h).

2 Push and turn the front-wheel

drive control switch to “4H”.

■If the “4HI” indicator is ON and

the “4LO” indicator continues

to flash

The “4HI” indicator will come on.

■ Shifting from “4H” to “2H”

Shift the shift lever to D or R and

drive the vehicle slowly, then stop.

1 Reduce vehicle speed to less

than 62 mph (100 km/h).

■If the “4HI” indicator continues

to flash and the “4LO” indicator

is ON

2 Push and turn the front-wheel

drive control switch to “2H”.

Shift the shift lever to D or R and

drive the vehicle slowly, then stop.

The “4HI” indicator will go off.

■If the “4HI” indicator is ON and

the “4LO” indicator continues

to flash and a buzzer sounds

Shifting between “4H”

and “4L”

The shift lever is not in N and/or the

vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle

completely, shift the shift lever to N

and make sure that the indicator

stops flashing.

■ Shifting from “4H” to “4L”

1 Stop the vehicle completely

and continue to depress the

brake pedal.

416

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■If the “4HI” indicator continues

to flash and the “4LO” indicator

is ON and a buzzer sounds

■When the vehicle is parked

If the shift lever is moved before

the “4HI” or “4LO” indicator turns

on/off, the transfer mode may not

be shifted completely. The trans-

fer mode disengages both the

front and rear driveshafts from the

powertrain and allows the vehicle

to move regardless of the shift

position. (At this time, the indica-

tor blinks and the buzzer sounds.)

Therefore, the vehicle is free to

roll even if the automatic trans-

mission is in P. You or someone

else could be seriously injured.

You must complete the shifting of

the transfer mode before placing

transmission in P.

The shift lever is not in N and/or the

vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle

completely, shift the shift lever to N

and make sure that the indicator

stops flashing

■If the “4HI” and “4LO” indicator

flashes rapidly

There may be a malfunction in the

four-wheel drive system. Have the

vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

■Shift between “4H” and “4L” at

low temperature

Immediately after starting the

engine in a low-temperature envi-

ronment, the shift between “4H” and

“4L” may be prohibited because the

transmission fluid is cold. At that

time, a warning message will be dis-

played in the multi-information dis-

play, so follow the message and

operate the front-wheel drive control

switch again after warming up.

■Four-wheel drive usage fre-

quency

You should drive in four-wheel drive

for at least 10 miles (16 km) each

month. This will assure that the front

drive components are lubricated.

WARNING

■Shifting the front-wheel drive

control switch from “2H” to

“4H” while driving

Never operate the front-wheel

drive control switch if the wheels

are slipping. Stop the slipping or

spinning before shifting.

417

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Hold down

select.

and turn the dial to

Four-w heel drive sys-

tem (full-time 4WD

models)

*

“L4L” (low speed position,

center differential locked)

*

: If equipped

Use this for maximum power and

traction. Use “L4L” for climbing or

descending steep hills, off-road

driving, and hard pulling in sand,

mud or deep snow.

Use the front-wheel drive

control switch to select the

following transfer modes:

The “4LO” indicator will come on.

Front-wheel drive control

switch

Hold down

select.

and turn the dial to

Shifting between “H4F”

and “H4L”

4

■ Shifting from “H4F” to

“H4L”

1 Reduce vehicle speed to less

than 62 mph (100 km/h).

2 Push and turn the front-wheel

drive control switch to “H4L”.

The center differential lock indicator

will come on.

■ Shifting from “H4L” to

“H4F”

“H4F” (high speed position)

Use this for normal driving on dry

hard-surfaced roads. This position

gives greater economy, quietest

ride and least wear.

1 Reduce vehicle speed to less

than 62 mph (100 km/h).

2 Push and turn the front-wheel

drive control switch to “H4F”.

Hold down

select.

and turn the dial to

The center differential lock indicator

will go off.

“H4L” (high speed position,

center differential locked)

Use this for driving only on tracks

that permit the tires slide, like off-

road, icy or snow-covered roads.

The center differential lock indicator

will come on.

418

4-5. Using the driving support systems

straight ahead while accelerating or

Shifting between “H4L”

and “L4L”

decelerating, or drive in reverse.

■If the center differential lock

indicator flashes and a buzzer

sounds

■ Shifting from “H4L” to

“L4L”

Locking of the center differential is

not complete. Stop the wheels from

slipping or spinning and, if the indi-

cator still flashes, operate the four-

wheel drive control switch again.

1 Stop the vehicle completely

and continue to depress the

brake pedal.

■If the center differential lock

indicator or the “4LO” indicator

flashes rapidly

2 Shift the shift lever to N.

3 Push and turn the front-wheel

drive control switch to “L4L”.

There may be a malfunction in the

four-wheel drive system. Have the

vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

The “4LO” indicator and center dif-

ferential lock indicator will come on.

■ Shifting from “L4L” to

■Shift between “H4L” and “L4L”

at low temperature

“H4L”

1 Stop the vehicle completely

and continue to depress the

brake pedal.

Immediately after starting the

engine in a low-temperature envi-

ronment, the shift between “H4L”

and “L4L” may be prohibited

because the transmission fluid is

cold. At that time, a warning mes-

sage will be displayed in the multi-

information display, so follow the

message and operate the front-

wheel drive control switch again

after warming up.

2 Shift the shift lever to N.

3 Push and turn the front-wheel

drive control switch to “H4L”.

The “4LO” indicator will go off.

■When the front-wheel drive con-

trol switch is shifted to “L4L”

WARNING

VSC is automatically turned off.

■Shifting the front-wheel drive

control switch from “H4F” to

“H4L” while driving

■If the “4LO” indicator continues

to flash

Never operate the front-wheel

drive control switch if the wheels

are slipping. Stop the slipping or

spinning before shifting.

Shift the shift lever to D or R and

drive the vehicle slowly, then stop.

■If the “4LO” indicator continues

to flash and a buzzer sounds

The shift lever is not in N and/or the

vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle

completely, shift the shift lever to N

and make sure that the indicator

stops flashing.

■If the center differential lock

indicator flashes

Locking or unlocking of the center

differential is not complete. Drive

419

4-5. Using the driving support systems

*

AUTO LSD system

WARNING

■When the vehicle is parked

*

: If equipped

If the shift lever is moved before

the “4LO” indicator turns on/off,

the transfer mode may not be

shifted completely. The transfer

mode disengages both the front

and rear driveshafts from the

powertrain and allows the vehicle

to move regardless of the shift

position. (At this time, the indica-

tor blinks and the buzzer sounds.)

Therefore, the vehicle is free to

roll even if the automatic trans-

mission is in P. You or someone

else could be seriously injured.

You must complete the shifting of

the transfer mode before placing

transmission in P.

The AUTO LSD system aids

traction by using the trac-

tion control system to con-

trol engine performance and

braking when one of the

drive wheels begins to spin.

The system should be used

only when one of the drive

wheels spinning occurs in a

ditch or rough surface.

System operation

4

The system can be used only on

2WD models.

To turn the AUTO LSD system

on, quickly press and release

.

The “AUTO LSD” indicator light

and VSC off indicator light will

come on.

Press

again to turn the sys-

tem off.

420

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When the AUTO LSD sys-

tem is operating

WARNING

■To avoid an accident

Failure to do so, a much greater

steering effort and more careful

cornering control will be required.

If the drive wheels spin, the slip

indicator flashes to indicate that

the AUTO LSD system has con-

trolled the spinning of the drive

wheels.

●Do not use the AUTO LSD sys-

tem in conditions other than

when one of the drive wheels

spinning occurs in a ditch or

rough surface.

●Do not drive with the AUTO

LSD system continuously

turned on.

NOTICE

■Activating while driving

Do not activate the AUTO LSD

system if the wheel is slipping.

Stop the slipping or spinning

before activating.

■If the engine is turned off and

restarted

The AUTO LSD system and the

indicators are automatically turned

off.

■Reactivation of the VSC system

linked to vehicle speed

When the AUTO LSD system is

turned on, the VSC and TRAC sys-

tems will turn on automatically if

vehicle speed increase.

■If the brake system overheats

The system will cease operation

and a buzzer will alert the driver. At

this time, the “AUTO LSD” indicator

will flash and “Traction Control

Turned OFF” will be shown on the

multi-information display. Stop the

vehicle in a safe place. (There is no

problem with continuing normal driv-

ing.) The system will be automati-

cally restored after a short time.

421

4-5. Using the driving support systems

the vehicle moves out.

Rear differential lock

*

■Unlocking the rear differential

system

If the rear differential lock indicator

still flashes even after unlocking the

rear differential, check the safety of

the surrounding area and slightly

turn the steering wheel in either

direction while the vehicle is in

motion.

*

: If equipped

Use the rear differential lock

system only when wheel

spinning occurs in a ditch

or on a slippery or ragged

surface. This system is

effective in case one of the

rear wheels is spinning.

■Automatic unlocking feature

The rear differential lock is also

unlocked in any of the following situ-

ations:

●When the front-wheel drive control

switch is turned to “2H” or “4H”

Rear differential lock

switch

●When the engine switch is turned

off

■After unlocking the rear differ-

ential

4

Press the switch to turn the sys-

tem on/off.

Check that the indicators go off.

■The rear differential lock indica-

tor and indicator in the differen-

tial lock/unlock display

At this time, the rear differential lock

indicator and indicator in the differ-

ential lock/unlock display will blink.

Wait a few seconds for the system

to complete operation. After the

rear differential is locked, the indi-

cators will stop blinking and remain

on.

●The indicators blink while lock-

ing/unlocking the rear differential.

●If the indicators continue to blink

when you operate the rear differ-

ential lock switch, stop the vehicle

completely and operate the switch

again.

To unlock the rear differential, push

the switch again.

If the indicators continue to blink

even if doing so, have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible. There may be a

trouble in the four-wheel drive sys-

tem.

■Locking the rear differential

The following systems do not oper-

ate when the rear differential is

locked.

• ABS

• Brake assist system

• VSC

■Operating tips

●Be sure to stop the wheels before

locking the differential.

• Downhill assist control system

• TRAC

●Unlock the differential as soon as

422

4-5. Using the driving support systems

*

Crawl Control

WARNING

■When using the rear differen-

tial lock system

*

: If equipped

Failure to observe the following

precautions may result in an acci-

dent.

Allows travel on extremely

rough off-road surfaces at a

fixed low speed without

pressing the accelerator or

brake pedal. Minimizes loss

of traction or vehicle slip

when driving on slippery

road surfaces, allowing for

stable driving.

●Do not lock the rear differential

in the conditions other than

above.

●Do not lock the rear differential

until the wheels have stopped

spinning.

●Do not drive over 5 mph (8

km/h) when the differential is

locked.

WARNING

■When using Crawl Control

function

●Do not keep driving with the

rear differential lock state

Do not rely solely on the Crawl

Control function. This function

does not extend the vehicle’s per-

formance limitations. Always thor-

oughly check the road conditions,

and drive safely.

■These conditions may cause

the system not to operate

properly

When driving on the following sur-

faces, the system may not be able

to maintain a fixed low speed,

which may result in an accident:

●Extremely steep inclines.

●Extremely uneven surfaces.

●Snow-covered roads, or other

slippery surfaces.

423

4-5. Using the driving support systems

on the multi-information dis-

play.

System components

Multi-information display

Selectable modes

“DAC/CRAWL” switch

Mode select switch

A mode which matches the road

conditions can be selected from

among the following 5 modes.

4

Multi-information display

“LO”

Suitable for driving on rocky roads

or decline

Turning Crawl Control on

1 Press the “DAC/CRAWL”

switch.

“LO-Mid”

Suitable for driving on rocky roads,

decline or bumpy incline

The Crawl Control indicator on the

multi-information display will come

on, and the slip indicator will flash.

“Mid”

Suitable for driving on bumpy

inclines

“Mid-HI”

Suitable for driving on bumpy

inclines, debris roads, snow-cov-

ered roads, muddy roads, gravel

roads and grass roads

“HI”

Suitable for driving on bumpy

inclines, debris roads, snow-cov-

ered roads, muddy roads, gravel

roads and grass roads

2 Turn the mode select switch

left or right to select a mode

424

4-5. Using the driving support systems

buzzer will sound intermittently and

Turning Crawl Control off

the Crawl Control will be canceled

automatically. In this event, the

Crawl Control indicator will flash and

then go off, and a message stating

that Crawl Control has been turned

off will be displayed on the multi-

information display for several sec-

onds.

 When the “DAC/CRAWL”

switch indicator illuminates

Press the “DAC/CRAWL” switch

again.

 When the “DAC/CRAWL”

switch indicator does not illu-

minate

●When the shift lever is moved to P

or N.

●When the front-wheel drive control

switch is in “4H”.

Press the “DAC/CRAWL” switch

to turn the indicator on. Press

the “DAC/CRAWL” switch again

with the indicator turned on.

●When the driver’s door is opened.

■Function limitations of Crawl

Control

●On vehicles with rear differential

lock system, in the following situa-

tions, brake control can be used to

drive downhill at a constant

speed. However, engine control is

not available when driving uphill at

a constant speed.

If Crawl Control is turned off, the

Crawl Control indicator and the

slip indicator will go off and a

message, stating that Crawl

Control has been turned off will

be displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display for several sec-

onds.

• When the vehicle speed exceeds

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

●In the following situation, engine

control and brake control will stop

temporarily. In this event, the

Crawl Control indicator will flash.

• With the rear differential is locked:

when the vehicle speed exceeds

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

• With the rear differential is

unlocked: when the vehicle speed

exceeds approximately 15 mph

(25 km/h).

When turning off Crawl Control

while driving, drive extremely

carefully.

■Operating tips

Crawl Control can be used with

Multi-terrain Select ON or OFF.

(P.425)

■When the Crawl Control sys-

tem is operated continuously

■Operation conditions of the

Crawl Control

●If Crawl Control is used continu-

ously for a long time, the brake

system overheats. In this case, a

buzzer will sound, a message

stating a malfunction will be dis-

played on the multi-information

display, and the Crawl Control

indicator will flash and then go off.

In this event, as Crawl Control will

be temporarily inoperable, stop

the vehicle immediately in a safe

place, and allow the brake system

to cool down sufficiently until the

●The engine is running.

●The shift lever is in any gear other

than P or N.

●The front-wheel drive control

switch is in “4L”.

●The driver’s door is closed.

■Automatic system cancelation

of Crawl Control

In the following situations, the

425

4-5. Using the driving support systems

message goes off. (In the mean-

time, normal driving is possible.)

*

Multi-terrain Select

●If Crawl Control is used continu-

ously for a long time, the auto-

matic transmission overheats. In

this case, a buzzer will sound, the

system will be temporarily can-

celed, and a message stating a

malfunction may be displayed on

the multi-information display. In

this event, stop the vehicle in a

safe place until the message goes

off.

*

: If equipped

Multi-terrain Select is a sys-

tem that improves drivabil-

ity in off-road situations.

Select a mode that most

closely matches the type of

terrain on which you are driv-

ing from several modes.

■Sounds and vibrations caused

by the Crawl Control system

Brake control, steering feel

and drive force control can be

optimized in accordance with

the selected mode.

●A sound may be heard from the

engine compartment when the

engine is started or just after the

vehicle begins to move. This

sound does not indicate that a

malfunction has occurred in Crawl

Control system.

4

WARNING

■When using the Multi-terrain

●Either of the following conditions

may occur when the Crawl Control

system is operating. None of

these are indicators that a mal-

function has occurred.

Select

Observe the following precautions

to avoid an accident that could

result in death or serious injuries:

• Vibrations may be felt through the

vehicle body and steering.

●Check that the selected mode

indicators are illuminated before

driving. Multi-terrain Select will

not operate when the indicators

are off.

• A motor sound may be heard after

the vehicle comes to a stop.

■When there is a malfunction in

the system

●The road conditions listed

(P.426) are for reference only.

There is a chance that the func-

tion may not be the most appro-

priate in terms of road

Warning lights and/or warning mes-

sages will turn on. (P.576, 587)

conditions such as pitch, slip-

periness, undulation, etc. Thor-

oughly check the road

conditions before driving.

●Multi-terrain Select is not

intended to expand the limits of

the vehicle. Check the road con-

ditions thoroughly beforehand,

and drive safely and carefully.

426

4-5. Using the driving support systems

2 Select the Multi-terrain Select

NOTICE

modes on the multi-informa-

tion display while turning the

mode select switch left and

right.

■Precaution for use

The Multi-terrain Select is

intended for use during off-road

driving. Do not use the system at

any other time.

Depending on the positions of the

front-wheel drive control switch, a

mode can be selected from among

the following modes.

System components

 Front-wheel drive control

switch is in “4L”

Road Condi-

Mode

tions

“MTS” switch

Suitable for the

“AUTO”

road conditions

Mode select switch

Suitable for

sandy roads

and other slip-

Multi-information display

Selected mode is displayed.

“SAND”

pery conditions

Switching modes

Suitable for

muddy roads

“MUD”

1 Press the “MTS” switch.

and other slip-

pery conditions

Suitable for

“ROCK”

rocky terrain

If the brake control has activated,

the slip indicator light will flash.

427

4-5. Using the driving support systems

off

 Front-wheel drive control

switch is in “4H”

●When the front-wheel drive control

switch is in “2H”

Road Condi-

tions

●When “TOW HAUL” mode is

selected while the front-wheel

drive control switch is in “4H”

Mode

Suitable for the

road conditions

●When drive mode select is

selected while the front-wheel

drive control switch is in “4H”

“AUTO”

Suitable for

bumpy road

■Turning off Multi-terrain Select

Performing the following turns Multi-

terrain Select off, and then the dis-

play on the multi-information display

will disappear.

“DIRT” conditions,

such as dirt

roads

Suitable for

sandy roads

“SAND”

 When the “MTS” switch indicator

is illuminated

and other slip-

pery conditions

Press the “MTS” switch while the

system is in operation.

4

 When the “MTS” switch indicator

is not illuminated

Suitable for

muddy roads

“MUD”

Press the “MTS” switch to turn the

indicator on.

and other slip-

pery conditions

Press the “MTS” switch again with

the Multi-terrain Select indicator illu-

minated.

Suitable for

“DEEP

deep snow

SNOW”

roads

■When the vehicle is stuck

If the brake control has activated,

the slip indicator light will flash.

Switching the transfer and differen-

tial

For the operation of the following

functions, refer to the following

pages.

When the vehicle is in “SAND”,

“MUD” or “DEEP SNOW” mode,

VSC is automatically turned off.

(VSC OFF indicator light come on.)

●Four-wheel drive system

(P.414)

●Rear differential lock system

(P.421)

■Driving in Multi-terrain Select

■Multi-terrain Select

Multi-terrain Select controls the

vehicle so that it can maximize the

drive force and improve drivability

on rough roads. As a result, fuel effi-

ciency may diminish when com-

pared to driving in normal mode.

The following types of situations

may occur, but they are not malfunc-

tions.

●Vibrations may be felt throughout

the vehicle or steering wheel.

■Automatic system cancelation

●Operating noise may be heard

from the engine compartment.

In the following situations, Multi-ter-

rain Select will be canceled auto-

matically.

●When the engine switch is turned

428

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■When an inspection at your

Downhill assist con-

Toyota dealer is necessary

*

trol system

In the following situations, the sys-

tem may be malfunctioning. Have

the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately.

*

: If equipped

The downhill assist control

system helps to prevent

excessive speed on steep

downhill slopes. The sys-

tem will operate when the

vehicle is traveling under 18

mph (30 km/h) and transfer

mode is in “4H”.

●When the slip indicator light illumi-

nates.

●When the indicator for each mode

does not illuminate on the multi-

information display even though

Multi-terrain Select is selected.

WARNING

■When using downhill assist

control system

Do not rely overmuch on the

downhill assist control system.

This function does not extend the

vehicle’s performance limitations.

Always thoroughly check the road

conditions, and drive safely.

System components

“DAC/CRAWL” switch

Mode select switch

429

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Multi-information display

System operation

Press the “DAC/CRAWL”

switch.

The downhill assist control system

indicator will comes on and the sys-

tem will operate.

Multi-information display

Decreases the speed

Increases the speed

When the system is in operation,

the slip indicator will flash, and the

stop lights/high mounted stop lights

will be lit. A sound may also occur

during the operation. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

Turning off the system

4

 When the “DAC/CRAWL”

switch indicator illuminates

Press the “DAC/CRAWL” switch

again.

 When the “DAC/CRAWL”

switch indicator does not illu-

minate

Press the “DAC/CRAWL” switch

to turn the indicator on.

Setting the speed of the

downhill assist control

system

Press the “DAC/CRAWL” switch

again with the indicator turned

on.

Turn the mode select switch to

set the desired speed (approx. 3

mph [4 km/h] to 18 mph [30

km/h]). The set speed is dis-

played on the multi-information

display.

The downhill assist control system

indicator will flash as the system

gradually ceases operation, and will

turn off when the system is fully off.

Press the “DAC/CRAWL” switch

while the downhill assist control

system indicator is flashing to start

the system again.

■Operating tips

●Downhill assist control system can

be used with “TOW HAUL” mode

430

4-5. Using the driving support systems

and drive mode select, or Multi-

terrain Select ON or OFF.

■Sounds and vibrations caused

by the downhill assist control

system

●The system will operate when the

shift lever is in a position other

than P, however to make effective

use of the system it is recom-

mended to select a lower shift

range.

●A sound may be heard from the

engine compartment when the

engine is started or just after the

vehicle begins to move. This

sound does not indicate that a

malfunction has occurred in down-

hill assist control system.

■If the downhill assist control

system indicator flashes

●Either of the following conditions

may occur when the downhill

assist control system is operating.

None of these are indicators that a

malfunction has occurred.

●In the following situations, the indi-

cator flashes and the system will

not operate:

• The front-wheel drive control

switch is changed to a position

other than “4H”.

• Vibrations may be felt through the

vehicle body and steering.

• The shift lever is in P.

• A motor sound may be heard after

the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The vehicle speed exceeds

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

• The brake system overheats.

■System malfunction

●In the following situations, the indi- In the following cases, have your

cator flashes to alert the driver,

but the system will operate:

• The shift lever is in N.

• The “DAC/CRAWL” switch is

pressed while the “DAC/CRAWL”

switch indicator illuminates.

vehicle checked by your Toyota

dealer.

●The downhill assist control system

indicator does not come on when

the “DAC/CRAWL” switch is

pressed.

The system will gradually ceases

operation. The indicator will flash

during operation, and then go off

when the system is fully off.

●The slip indicator light comes on.

WARNING

■When the downhill assist con-

trol system is operated continu-

ously

■The system may not operate

on the following surfaces,

which may lead to an acci-

dent causing death or serious

injury

This may cause the brake actuator

to overheat. In this case, the down-

hill assist control system will stop

operating, a buzzer will sound and

the downhill assist control system

indicator will start flashing, and the

“Traction Control Turned OFF” indi-

cator light will come on. Refrain from

using the system until the downhill

assist control system indicator stays

on and “Traction Control Turned

OFF” indicator light turns off. (The

vehicle can be driven normally

during this time.)

●Slippery surfaces such as wet

or muddy roads

●Icy surface

●Unpaved roads

431

4-5. Using the driving support systems

turning on slippery road sur-

faces.

Driving assist system s

■ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced

Vehicle Stability Control)

To keep driving safety and

performance, the following

systems operate automati-

cally in response to various

driving situations. Be

Provides cooperative control of

the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.

Helps to maintain directional

stability when swerving on slip-

pery road surfaces by con-

trolling steering performance.

aware, however, that these

systems are supplementary

and should not be relied

upon too heavily when oper-

ating the vehicle.

■ Trailer Sway Control

Helps the driver to control trailer

sway by selectively applying

brake pressure for individual

wheels and reducing driving

torque when trailer sway is

detected.

Summary of the driving

assist systems

4

■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem)

■ TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to prevent wheel lock

when the brakes are applied

suddenly, or if the brakes are

applied while driving on a slip-

pery road surface, or in off-road

conditions (such as rough

roads, sand and mud)

Helps to maintain drive power

and prevent the drive wheels

from spinning when starting the

vehicle or accelerating on slip-

pery roads

■ Hill-start assist control

The ABS operates in synchroni-

zation with the Multi-terrain

Select

Helps to reduce the backward

movement of the vehicle when

starting on an uphill

■ Brake assist

■ AVS (Adaptive Variable

Suspension System) (if

equipped)

Generates an increased level of

braking force after the brake

pedal is depressed when the

system detects a panic stop sit-

uation

The damping force of the shock

absorbers are independently

controlled for the 4 wheels

■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Con-

trol)

according to factors including

the road surface conditions and

driving operation, contributing

toward enhancing smooth driv-

Helps the driver to control skid-

ding when swerving suddenly or

432

4-5. Using the driving support systems

ing comfort and superior stabil-

ity, and helping to maintain

vehicle posture.

In addition, the damping force

can be changed by selecting the

drive mode with the driving

mode select (P.412), and driv-

ing comfort can be ensured

during off-road driving by setting

the front-wheel drive control

switch to “L4L”. (P.417)

■Disabling the TRAC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt

or snow, the TRAC system may

reduce power from the engine to the

■ EPS (Electric Power Steer-

ing)

wheels. Pressing

to turn the

system off may make it easier for

you to rock the vehicle in order to

free it.

Employs an electric motor to

reduce the amount of effort

needed to turn the steering

wheel.

To turn the TRAC system off, quickly

press and release

.

■ The Secondary Collision

Brake

“Traction Control Turned OFF” is

displayed in the multi-information

display.

When the SRS airbag sensor

detects a collision and the sys-

tem operates, the brakes and

brake lights are automatically

controlled to reduce the vehicle

speed and help reduce the pos-

sibility of further damage due to

a secondary collision.

Press

again to turn the system

back on.

■When the

TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer Sway

Control systems are operating

The slip indicator light will flash

while the TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer

Sway Control systems are operat-

ing.

■Turning off the

TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Con-

trol systems

To turn the TRAC, VSC and Trailer

Sway Control systems off, press

and hold

for more than 3 sec-

onds while the vehicle is stopped.

The “Traction Control Turned OFF”

433

4-5. Using the driving support systems

is displayed in the multi-information

display and the VSC OFF indicator

●The accelerator pedal is

depressed

*

●The parking brake is engaged

light will come on.

●A maximum of 2 seconds have

elapsed after the brake pedal is

released

Press

again to turn the system

back on.

●The engine switch is turned to

OFF

*

: PCS will also be disabled (only

Pre-Collision warning is avail-

able). The PCS warning light will

come on and a message will be

displayed on the multi-information

display. (P.578)

■Sounds and vibrations caused

by the ABS, brake assist, VSC,

Trailer Sway Control, TRAC and

hill-start assist control systems

●A sound may be heard from the

engine compartment when the

brake pedal is depressed repeat-

edly, when the engine is started or

just after the vehicle begins to

move. This sound does not indi-

cate that a malfunction has

■When the message is dis-

played on the multi-information

display showing that TRAC has

been disabled even if

not been pressed

has

4

occurred in any of these systems.

●TRAC is temporary deactivated. If

the information continues to show,

contact your Toyota dealer.

●Any of the following conditions

may occur when the above sys-

tems are operating. None of these

indicates that a malfunction has

occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the

vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard also

after the vehicle comes to a stop.

●When using Multi-terrain Select,

the “VSC OFF” indicator will turn

on depending on the mode, even

if the VSC OFF switch has not

been pressed.

■Operating conditions of hill-

start assist control

■Automatic reactivation of

TRAC, Trailer Sway Control and

VSC systems

When the following five conditions

are met, the hill-start assist control

will operate:

After turning the TRAC, Trailer

Sway Control and VSC systems off,

the systems will be automatically re-

enabled in the following situations:

●The shift lever is in a position

other than P or N (when starting

off forward/backward on an

upward incline)

●When the engine switch is turned

off

●The vehicle is stopped

●If only the TRAC system is turned

off, the TRAC will turn on when

vehicle speed increases

If both the TRAC and VSC sys-

tems are turned off, automatic re-

enabling will not occur when vehi-

cle speed increases.

●The accelerator pedal is not

depressed

●The parking brake is not engaged

●The engine switch is turned to ON

■Automatic system cancelation

of hill-start assist control

■Reduced effectiveness of the

EPS system

The hill-start assist control will turn

off in any of the following situations:

The effectiveness of the EPS sys-

tem is reduced to prevent the sys-

●The shift lever is shifted to P or N

434

4-5. Using the driving support systems

tem from overheating when there is

frequent steering input over an

extended period of time. The steer-

ing wheel may feel heavy as a

result. Should this occur, refrain

from excessive steering input or

stop the vehicle and turn the engine

off. The EPS system should return

to normal within 10 minutes.

■Stopping distance when the

ABS is operating may exceed

that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to

shorten the vehicle’s stopping dis-

tance. Always maintain a safe dis-

tance from the vehicle in front of

you, especially in the following sit-

uations:

■Secondary Collision Brake

operating conditions

●When driving on dirt, gravel or

snow-covered roads

The system operates when the SRS

airbag sensor detects a collision

while the vehicle is in motion. How-

ever, the system does not operate

when the components are dam-

aged.

●When driving with tire chains

●When driving over bumps in the

road

●When driving over roads with

potholes or uneven surfaces

■Secondary Collision Brake

automatic cancelation

The system is automatically can-

celed in any of the following situa-

tions.

■TRAC/VSC may not operate

effectively when

Directional control and power may

not be achievable while driving on

slippery road surfaces, even if the

TRAC/VSC system is operating.

Drive the vehicle carefully in con-

ditions where stability and power

may be lost.

●The vehicle speed drops to

approximately 0 mph (0 km/h).

●A certain amount of time elapses

during operation

●The accelerator pedal is

depressed a large amount

■Hill-start assist control does

not operate effectively when

WARNING

●Do not overly rely on hill-start

assist control. Hill-start assist

control may not operate effec-

tively on steep inclines and

roads covered with ice.

■The ABS does not operate

effectively when

●The limits of tire gripping perfor-

mance have been exceeded

(such as excessively worn tires

on a snow covered road).

●Unlike the parking brake, hill-

start assist control is not

intended to hold the vehicle sta-

tionary for an extended period

of time. Do not attempt to use

hill-start assist control to hold

the vehicle on an incline, as

doing so may lead to an acci-

dent.

●The vehicle hydroplanes while

driving at high speed on wet or

slick roads.

435

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Trailer Sway Control precau-

WARNING

tion

■When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer

Sway Control is activated

The Trailer Sway Control system

is not able to reduce trailer sway

in all situations. Depending on

many factors such as the condi-

tions of the vehicle, trailer, road

surface and driving environment,

the Trailer Sway Control system

may not be effective. Refer to

your trailer owner’s manual for

information on how to tow your

trailer properly.

The slip indicator light flashes.

Always drive carefully. Reckless

driving may cause an accident.

Exercise particular care when the

indicator light flashes.

■When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer

Sway Control systems are

turned off

Be especially careful and drive at

a speed appropriate to the road

conditions. As these are the sys-

tems to help ensure vehicle stabil-

ity and driving force, do not turn

the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Con-

trol systems off unless necessary.

■If trailer sway occurs

Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failing to do so may cause death

or serious injury.

4

●Firmly grip the steering wheel.

Steer straight ahead. Do not try

to control trailer sway by turning

the steering wheel.

Trailer Sway Control is part of the

VSC system and will not operate

if VSC is turned off or experiences

a malfunction.

●Begin releasing the accelerator

pedal immediately but very

gradually to reduce speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not

apply vehicle brakes.

■Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the

specified size, brand, tread pat-

tern and total load capacity. In

addition, make sure that the tires

are inflated to the recommended

tire inflation pressure level.

If you make no extreme correction

with the steering or brakes, your

vehicle and trailer should stabi-

lize. (P.205)

The ABS, TRAC, Trailer Sway

Control and VSC systems will not

function correctly if different tires

are installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther information when replacing

tires or wheels.

■Secondary Collision Brake

Do not rely solely upon the Sec-

ondary Collision Brake. This sys-

tem is designed to help reduce

the possibility of further damage

due to a secondary collision, how-

ever, that effect changes accord-

ing to various conditions. Overly

relying on the system may result

in death or serious injury.

■Handling of tires and the sus-

pension

Using tires with any kind of prob-

lem or modifying the suspension

will affect the driving assist sys-

tems, and may cause a system to

malfunction.

436

SDM (Stabilizer w ith

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Turning the system on/off

Disconnection Mecha-

*

Press the SDM switch

nism )

The stabilizer is unlocked and the

SDM indicator will come on.

*

: If equipped

Press the switch again to lock the

stabilizer (the SDM indicator will

turn off).

SDM (Stabilizer with Discon-

nection Mechanism) is a

system that switches condi-

tions of the front stabilizer

to maintain vehicle stability

and drivability on paved

road and off-road situa-

tions.

While the stabilizer is being locked

or unlocked, the SDM indicator

flashes.

How SDM (Stabilizer with

Disconnection Mecha-

nism) works

Depending on the switch opera-

tion or vehicle speed, the stabi-

lizer is locked/unlocked, which

results in the following effects.

■Operation conditions by the

switch

The engine switch is in ON and the

vehicle speed is approximately 18

mph (30 km/h) or less.

■ During driving on paved

roads

■Automatic control by vehicle

speed

The stabilizer is locked and the

movement of the suspensions is

restrained, resulting in stable

driving.

The stabilizer will be locked again

when the vehicle speed exceeds

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

■Operation sounds

■ During off-road driving

When the stabilizer is being locked

or unlocked, an operating sound

may be heard from the underside of

the vehicle. However, it does not

indicate a malfunction.

 The stabilizer is unlocked and

it becomes easier that the

suspensions extend and

retract, leading to improve-

ment of drivability on rough

roads

■When the state of the SDM indi-

cator differs from the stabilizer

status

On an uneven surface, the stabilizer

status may not be switched and may

differ from the state of the SDM indi-

cator. The stabilizer status will be

 The vibration of the vehicle

body is reduced, which helps

enhance riding comfort.

437

4-5. Using the driving support systems

switched after the vehicle is driven

and the suspensions extend or

retract.

Trailer brake c ontrol-

*

ler

■When the outside temperature

is extremely low

*

: If equipped

Do not use the system when the

outside temperature is below -22°F

(-30°C), as the system may not

operate properly.

The trailer brakes can be

controlled by the Trailer

brake controller via the 7-

pin connector. By selecting

the type of brakes that are

being used on the trailer

(electric or electric-over-

hydraulic) and setting the

“gain” for the controller, the

manual brake slider is used

to slow just the trailer. The

vehicle brake pedal will also

slow down as well as stop

the trailer when applied,

also via the same connec-

tor. “Gain” values, manual

brake outputs, trailer brake

types, and the trailer con-

nection status are displayed

in the multi-information dis-

play.

■After the engine switch is

turned to OFF

The stabilizer status is hold even

when the engine switch is turned to

OFF. To switch the status, turn the

engine switch to ON again and

press the SDM switch.

■When the stabilizer is unlocked

When the stabilizer is unlocked,

some of the Toyota Safety Sense

3.0 are not operate. (P.256)

4

This vehicle comes

equipped with a Toyota

Genuine Trailer Brake Con-

troller. Use of a third-party

trailer brake controller

along with the Toyota Genu-

ine Trailer Brake Controller

may have unexpected

effects on the system. Toy-

ota does not recommend

the use of a third-party

brake controller with this

vehicle.

438

4-5. Using the driving support systems

trailer brake type is selected in the

WARNING

multi-information display.

■When driving on slippery

road surfaces

Manual brake slider

Adjusting this slider position will

engage the trailer’s brakes only. If

the manual brake slider is used

while the vehicle brake is applied,

the greater of the two outputs will

be sent to the trailer brakes.

When stopping with ABS acti-

vated, output to the trailer might

be reduced in order to reduce the

likelihood of trailer wheels to lock.

The trailer is not equipped with

ABS. Drive safely on slippery road

surfaces.

Changing settings of the

trailer brake type

System operation

Select the item desired to be

setup and select as follows on

the multi-information screen

(P.96, 105):

1 Vehicles with 7-inch display:

Press

or

on the meter

control switch and then select

.

Vehicles with 12.3-inch display:

Press and hold

to display the

“GAIN” (+/-) selection button

cursor on the content display area

(center) of the multi-information dis-

play.

Pressing the “GAIN” (+/-) buttons

will adjust the amount of power that

can be outputted to the trailer

brakes. The “gain” can be adjusted

from 0 (no trailer braking) to 10

(maximum output) in 0.5 incre-

ments. Each press of the button will

increase or decrease the “gain” set-

ting by one step. The “gain” value

will appear in the multi-information

display.

2 Press

or

on the meter

control switch, select “Trailer

Settings”, and then press and

hold

on the meter control

switch.

3 According to the display,

select the desired setting and

Trailer brake type

Trailer brake type can be selected

by using the multi-information. The

combination meter will show which

then press

.

Changing trailer brake type or

trailer ID will cause the current

439

4-5. Using the driving support systems

“gain” setting to reset to zero.

Make sure to set the “gain” as

described in the following sec-

tion.

5 Using the “GAIN” (+/-) selec-

tion buttons, set a starting

“gain” of 5.0.

Setting the “Gain”

“Gain” setting on trailer brake

controller should be set for a

specific towing condition. “Gain”

setting should be adjusted each

time the vehicle load, trailer

load, road conditions, or

6 While driving 20 - 25 mph [35

- 40 km/h], fully apply the

manual brake slider.

weather changes. Setting the

“gain” value to 0 will disable the

trailer brake controller output.

4

7 Adjust the “gain” setting,

using the “GAIN” (+/-) selec-

tion buttons, to either

1 Make sure the trailer brakes

are in good working condition

and functioning normally. See

trailer dealer if necessary.

increase or decrease to just

below the point of trailer

wheel lock-up.

2 Hook up the trailer and make

proper electrical connections.

8 For confirmation, repeat

steps 6 and 7 until desired

“gain” setting is reached (just

below point of trailer wheel

lock-up).

3 Select the correct type of

trailer brakes that are

equipped on the trailer by

using the multi-information

display.

■When setting the “gain”

4 Drive vehicle with trailer

attached on a level road sur-

face similar to towing condi-

tion and in traffic-free

Wheel lock-up occurs when the

trailer wheel squeals or tire smoke

occurs. Trailer wheels may not lock-

up while driving heavily loaded

trailer. During this case, adjust the

Trailer “gain” to the highest allow-

able setting for the towing condition.

environment. Driving speed

should be approximately 20 -

25 mph [35 - 40 km/h].

■When disconnecting and recon-

necting battery terminals

The “gain” setting data will be reset.

■Trailer Sway Control Function

Helps suppress trailer sway at an

early stage by using the trailer brake

control system to operate the trailer

440

4-5. Using the driving support systems

brakes.

*

Trailer Backup Guide

■If the Trailer brake warning light

comes on

*

: If equipped

Indicates a malfunction in the Trailer

brake control system or Trailer con-

nector circuit.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

Trailer Backup Guide is a

system to assist when back-

ing up a trailer by providing

either (1) steering control to

assist backing up straight

(Straight Path Assist) or (2)

guidance for manual steer-

ing backup (Guidance

mode).

Trailer Backup Guide uses

the rear camera to detect

the trailer and a trailer hitch

light, which allows the

driver to use the system at

night time.

WARNING

■Trailer brake type setting

It is the responsibility of the driver

to make sure the trailer brakes

are functioning normally and

adjusted appropriately. Failure to

check and maintain trailer brakes

may result in loss of vehicle con-

trol, crash, or serious injury.

Trailer brake control system will

work with most electric and elec-

tric-overhydraulic trailer braking

systems up to 3 axles (24A output

to trailer brakes). Please be sure

to test compatibility with the sys-

tem at low speeds and in a safe

area. If a warning message

The system calculates the

trailer angle by image pro-

cessing from the rear cam-

era and calculates trailer

length and hitch length

during the trailer setup (cali-

bration) maneuver.

Procedure

appears in the multi-information

display (P.587), have the vehi-

cle inspected by your Toyota

dealer immediately. Some elec-

tric-over-hydraulic trailer brakes

will take some minimum output to

activate. Trailer brake control sys-

tem will not work with trailer

1 Select “Trailer Settings” on

the multi-information display

and add a trailer according to

the display. (P.96, 105)

hydraulic surge brakes.

441

4-5. Using the driving support systems

2 Press the switch to turn the

system ON.

“Trailer Direction”

When using Straight Path Assist,

the driver can override the system

using the steering wheel to adjust

the trailer direction. Upon release of

the steering wheel, Straight Path

Assist re-activates with a revised

straight back target direction.

■When adding the trailer

Select “Trailer Settings” on the

multi-information display and add a

trailer according to the display.

(P.96, 105)

Trailer Settings are not available

while Trailer Backup Guide system

is active.

3 Continue or reselect the

trailer in the message dis-

played on the multi-informa-

tion display.

The system is designed to support

trailers with single or multi-axles

using a ball hitch. The system does

not support fifth wheel or gooseneck

trailers.

4

When the selected trailer is being

used for the first time, setup (cali-

bration) is necessary (P.441).

Once calibration is completed, it is

retained for future use and the sys-

tem will automatically detect the

trailer.

Setup (Calibration)

The driver needs to change the

trailer selection when using a differ-

ent trailer. The system does not

automatically recognize the trailer

from the saved trailers list.

Bring the vehicle and trailer to a

large open space like an empty

parking lot. Activate Trailer

Backup Guide system and fol-

low the instructions displayed on

the multi-information dis-

4 Once trailer is detected, shift

the shift lever to R to activate

Guidance mode.

play/multimedia.

5 Touch the switch at the bot-

tom right on multimedia to

activate Straight Path Assist.

For best calibration results, do

not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h).

1 Drive straight forward slowly

442

4-5. Using the driving support systems

(5 mph [8 km/h] or less) while

holding the steering wheel

straight.

State where the blue line aligns

with the center of the trailer.

(Select “Yes” in the multi-infor-

mation display)

2 Stop vehicle with trailer

straight and confirm blue line

is aligned with trailer center

in Camera view.

State where the blue line does

not align with the center of the

trailer. (Select “No” in the multi-

information display)

3 Drive forward slowly making

a left or right turn that

changes vehicle direction 90

degrees or more.

Blue line

●The system is designed to support

most trailers 6.6 ft. (2 m) to 26.2 ft.

(8 m) in length (length is defined

from the coupler center point for

the ball to the wheel axle [single

axle] or center of the wheel axles

[2 or more axles]) with ball mount

lengths between 4.5 in. (114.3

mm) and 18.5 in. (469.9 mm). Do

not attempt to use trailers or ball

mounts that have a length outside

of this range as the system perfor-

mance degrades and could cause

improper system function.

4 After completing the turn,

continue straight forward

slowly to align trailer.

5 Stop vehicle to complete cali-

bration.

■When calibrating the system

●Please check whether the blue

line appropriately aligns with the

center of the trailer in the camera

view, such as in the following dia-

gram, with regards to procedure

2.

Trailer length

Ball mount length

●For best calibration results, cali-

brate in daytime on a smooth and

level road.

●It may be necessary at times to re-

calibrate the trailer to improve per-

formance.

●The system is designed to be

used with the same trailer connec-

tion every time. If the ball mount

position is changed or reconfig-

ured or items are added to the

443

4-5. Using the driving support systems

trailer tongue after calibration, re-

calibration may be required.

Canceling the system

 Trailer Backup Guide system

is canceled when the trailer

cannot be detected (e.g. dirty

camera lens, insufficient light-

ing condition, obstruction of

the trailer in the rear camera

view, incorrectly selected

trailer, etc.)

Using Guidance mode

Guidance mode provides a

“Trailer Direction” arrow that

indicates the direction the trailer

will swing, based on calculations

from the steering wheel angle

information. Guidance mode

provides a “BRAKE Extreme

Trailer Angle” (jackknife) warn-

ing with warning buzzer to alert

the driver that the trailer angle is

near the jackknife condition.

 Guidance mode is canceled

when any of the following

occurs:

• Press the Trailer Backup Guide

*

switch

4

*

• Press the Camera switch

Using Straight Path

Assist

• Vehicle speed is greater than

approximately 4.7 mph (7.6 km/h)

*

Touch the switch at the bottom

right on multimedia to activate

Straight Path Assist. Straight

Path Assist controls steering to

back up the trailer in a straight-

line. The system can be overrid-

den by using steering wheel to

adjust trailer direction.

• VSC or ABS is operated

*

• Back door is opened

• Trailer tracking is lost

• Shift the shift lever out of R

*

• There is a system malfunction

*

: Includes Trailer Backup Guide

system cancel

The driver is always responsible

for paying attention to the vehi-

cle’s surroundings and driving

safely. This system does not

control braking. Driver needs to

control vehicle speed, control

braking, and stop the vehicle to

avoid any collision.

 Straight Path Assist is can-

celed when any of the follow-

ing occurs:

• Any of the events, above, that

cancel Guidance mode occur

• Press the Straight Path Assist

switch on the multimedia screen

• The system temperature preser-

vation function operates (to pre-

vent power steering equipment

from overheating)

For best results, reverse slowly

when using Straight Path Assist.

444

Trailer hitch light

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■When using the Trailer

Backup Guide

For proper system performance,

observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may lead to an

accident resulting in property

damage, serious injury, or death.

●Keep the back door fully

latched.

●Keep the rear camera clean at

all times.

●Do not change the installation

position or direction of the rear

camera or remove it.

This light’s usage for Trailer

Backup Guide is controlled by

the Trailer Backup Guide sys-

tem and the driver does not

need to activate the light sepa-

rately.

●Do not modify the trailer hitch

light. (P.444)

●Make sure nothing can obstruct

the rear camera view of the

trailer.

For other usage: P.470

The system is designed to oper-

ate in various weather and lighting

conditions and on different ground

surfaces (asphalt, grass, gravel,

etc.), however performance can

still be affected by various envi-

ronmental factors (e.g. shadow

passing over the trailer or dimin-

ished contrast between trailer and

the ground leading to trailer

detection being lost, etc.) so

always drive carefully, remain

alert and aware of your surround-

ings, and do not overly rely on the

system.

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of

the system

In order for this system to perform

as designed, the vehicle must be

driven safely and the driver must

control the speed to keep it within

operating parameters and to

avoid a collision.

As there is a limit to the degree of

control performance that this sys-

tem can provide, do not overly

rely on this system. The driver is

always responsible for paying

attention to the vehicle’s sur-

roundings and driving safely. This

system does not control braking

(or steering when in Guidance

mode). Driver needs to control

vehicle speed, control braking,

(and steering when in Guidance

mode,) and stop the vehicle to

avoid any collision. Failure to fol-

low this warning could result in

property damage, serious injury

or death.

445

4-6. Driving tips

WARNING

4-6.Driving tips

Off-road precautions

■Off-road vehicle precautions

This vehicle belongs to the

utility vehicle class, which

has higher ground clear-

ance and narrower tread in

relation to the height of its

center of gravity to make it

capable of performing in a

wide variety of off-road

applications.

Always observe the following pre-

cautions to minimize the risk of

death, serious injury or damage to

your vehicle:

●In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more

likely to die than a person wear-

ing a seat belt. Therefore, the

driver and all passengers

should always fasten their seat

belts.

●Avoid sharp turns or abrupt

maneuvers, if at all possible.

Failure to operate this vehicle

correctly may result in loss of

control or vehicle rollover caus-

ing death or serious injury.

Off-road vehicle features

 Specific design characteris-

tics give it a higher center of

gravity than ordinary passen-

ger cars. This vehicle design

feature causes this type of

vehicle to be more likely to

rollover. And, Utility vehicles

have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types

of vehicles.

4

●Loading cargo on the roof lug-

gage carrier (if equipped) will

make the center of the vehicle

gravity higher. Avoid high

speeds, sudden starts, sharp

turns, sudden braking or abrupt

maneuvers, otherwise it may

result in loss of control or vehi-

cle rollover due to failure to

operate this vehicle correctly.

 An advantage of the higher

ground clearance is a better

view of the road allowing you

to anticipate problems.

●Always slow down in gusty

crosswinds. Because of its pro-

file and higher center of gravity,

your vehicle is more sensitive to

side winds than an ordinary

passenger car.

 It is not designed for corner-

ing at the same speeds as

ordinary passenger cars any

more than low-slung sports

cars are designed to perform

satisfactorily under off-road

conditions. Therefore, sharp

turns at excessive speeds

may cause the vehicle to roll-

over.

Slowing down will allow you to

have better control.

●Do not drive horizontally across

steep slopes. Driving straight up

or straight down is preferred.

Your vehicle (or any similar off-

road vehicle) can tip over side-

ways much more easily than

forward or backward.

446

4-6. Driving tips

Off-road driving

WARNING

■Off-road driving precautions

When driving your vehicle off-

road, please observe the follow-

ing precautions to ensure your

driving enjoyment and to help

prevent the closure of areas to

off-road vehicles:

Always observe the following pre-

cautions to minimize the risk of

death, serious injury or damage to

your vehicle:

●Drive carefully when off the

road. Do not take unnecessary

risks by driving in dangerous

places.

 Drive your vehicle only in

areas where off-road vehicles

are permitted to travel.

●Do not grip the steering wheel

spokes when driving off-road. A

bad bump could jerk the wheel

and injure your hands. Keep

both hands and especially your

thumbs on the outside of the

rim.

 Respect private property. Get

owner’s permission before

entering private property.

 Do not enter areas that are

closed. Honor gates, barriers

and signs that restrict travel.

●Always check your brakes for

effectiveness immediately after

driving in sand, mud, water or

snow.

 Stay on established roads.

When conditions are wet,

driving techniques should be

changed or travel delayed to

prevent damage to roads.

●After driving through tall grass,

mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc.,

check that there is no grass,

bush, paper, rags, stone, sand,

etc. adhering or trapped on the

underbody. Clear off any such

matter from the underbody. If

the vehicle is used with these

materials trapped or adhering to

the underbody, a breakdown or

fire could occur.

■ Additional information for

off-road driving

 For owners in U.S. mainland,

Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

●In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more

likely to die than a person wear-

ing a seat belt. Therefore, the

driver and all passengers

should fasten their seat belts

whenever the vehicle is moving.

To obtain additional information

pertaining to driving your vehicle

off-road, consult the following

organizations.

 State and Local Parks and

Recreation Departments

 State Motor Vehicle Bureau

 Recreational Vehicle Clubs

 U.S. Forest Service and

Bureau of Land Management

447

4-6. Driving tips

■Inspection after off-road driv-

ing

WARNING

●When driving off-road or in rug-

ged terrain, do not drive at

excessive speeds, jump, make

sharp turns, strike objects, etc.

This may cause loss of control

or vehicle rollover causing

death or serious injury. You are

also risking expensive damage

to your vehicle’s suspension

and chassis.

●Sand and mud that has accu-

mulated around brake discs

may affect braking efficiency

and may damage brake system

components.

●Always perform a maintenance

inspection after each day of off-

road driving that has taken you

through rough terrain, sand,

mud, or water. For scheduled

maintenance information, refer

to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement”.

NOTICE

■To prevent water damage

Take all necessary safety mea-

sures to ensure that water dam-

age to the engine or other

4

components does not occur.

●Water entering the engine air

intake will cause severe engine

damage.

●Water entering the automatic

transmission will cause deterio-

ration in shift quality, locking up

of your transmission accompa-

nied by vibration, and ultimately

damage.

●Water can wash the grease

from wheel bearings, causing

rusting and premature failure,

and may also enter the differen-

tials, transmission and transfer

case, reducing the gear oil’s

lubricating qualities.

■When you drive through

water

If driving through water, such as

when crossing shallow streams,

first check the depth of the water

and the bottom of the riverbed for

firmness. Press the Stop & Start

cancel switch to disable the Stop

& Start system. (vehicles with

Stop & Start system) Drive slowly

and avoid deep water.

448

4-6. Driving tips

●Maintain the recommended

level of air pressure.

Winter driving tips

●Do not drive in excess of 75

mph (120 km/h), regardless of

the type of snow tires being

used.

Carry out the necessary

preparations and inspec-

tions before driving the

vehicle in winter. Always

drive the vehicle in a man-

ner appropriate to the pre-

vailing weather conditions.

●Use snow tires on all, not just

some wheels.

●4WD models: Do not mix tires of

different makes, models, tread

patterns or treadwear.

■Driving with tire chains (vehi-

cles without 265/70R18 tires)

Preparation for winter

Observe the following precautions

to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in the

vehicle being unable to be driven

safely, and may cause death or

serious injury.

 Use fluids that are appropriate

to the prevailing outside tem-

peratures.

• Engine oil

• Engine/power control unit coolant

• Washer fluid

●Do not drive in excess of the

speed limit specified for the tire

chains being used, or 30 mph

(50 km/h), whichever is lower.

 Have a service technician

inspect the condition of the

battery.

●Avoid driving on bumpy road

surfaces or over potholes.

 Have the vehicle fitted with

four snow tires or purchase a

set of tire chains for the rear

●Avoid sudden acceleration,

abrupt steering, sudden brak-

ing and shifting operations that

cause sudden engine braking.

tires^*.

●Slow down sufficiently before

entering a curve to ensure that

vehicle control is maintained.

*

: Tire chains cannot be mounted

on 265/70R18 tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same

size and brand, and that chains

match the size of the tires.

●Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing

Assist) system.

WARNING

■Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions

to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a

loss of vehicle control and cause

death or serious injury.

●Use tires of the specified size.

449

4-6. Driving tips

When driving the vehicle

NOTICE

■Repairing or replacing snow

Accelerate the vehicle slowly,

keep a safe distance between

you and the vehicle ahead, and

drive at a reduced speed suit-

able to road conditions.

tires

Request repairs or replacement of

snow tires from Toyota dealers or

legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and

attachment of snow tires affects

the operation of the tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters.

When parking the vehicle

 Turn automatic mode of the

parking brake off.

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according

to the driving conditions:

Otherwise, the parking brake

may freeze and not be able to

be released automatically.

Also, avoid using the following

as the parking brake may

operate automatically, even if

automatic mode is off.

 Do not try to forcibly open a

window or move a wiper that

is frozen. Pour warm water

over the frozen area to melt

the ice. Wipe away the water

immediately to prevent it from

freezing.

4

• Brake hold system

 Park the vehicle and move

the shift lever to P without set-

ting the parking brake. The

parking brake may freeze up,

preventing it from being

released. If the vehicle is

parked without setting the

parking brake, make sure to

block the wheels.

 To ensure proper operation of

the climate control system

fan, remove any snow that

has accumulated on the air

inlet vents in front of the wind-

shield.

 Check for and remove any

excess ice or snow that may

have accumulated on the

exterior lights, outside rear

view mirrors, windows, vehi-

cle’s roof, chassis, around the

tires or on the brakes.

Failure to do so may be dan-

gerous because it may cause

the vehicle to move unexpect-

edly, possibly leading to an

accident.

 When the parking brake is in

automatic mode, release the

parking brake after shifting

the shift lever to P. (P.223)

 Remove any snow or mud

from the bottom of your shoes

before getting in the vehicle.

 If the vehicle is parked without

450

4-6. Driving tips

setting the parking brake,

confirm that the shift lever

cannot be moved out of P.

0.25 in. (6.3 mm) in diameter

0.89 in. (22.6 mm) in width

1.50 in. (38.1 mm) in length

 Vehicles with 265/70R18 tires

 If the vehicle is left parked

with the brakes damp in cold

temperatures, there is a pos-

sibility of the brakes freezing.

Tire chains cannot be mounted

as the space between the tire

and body is too narrow.

WARNING

Snow tires should be used

instead.

■When parking the vehicle

When parking the vehicle without

applying the parking brake, make

sure to chock the wheels. If you

do not chock the wheels, the vehi-

cle may move unexpectedly, pos-

sibly resulting in an accident.

Regulations on the use of

tire chains (vehicles with-

out 265/70R18 tires)

Selecting tire chains

Regulations regarding the use

of tire chains vary depending on

location and type of road.

Always check local regulations

before installing chains.

 Vehicles without 265/70R18

tires

Use the correct tire chain size

when mounting the tire chains.

Chain size is regulated for each

tire size.

■Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions

when installing and removing

chains:

●Install and remove tire chains in a

safe location.

●Install tire chains on the rear tires.

Do not install tire chains on the

front tires.

●Install tire chains on the rear tires

as tightly as possible. Retighten

chains after driving 1/41/2 mile

(0.51.0 km).

●Install tire chains following the

instructions provided with the tire

chains.

Side chain:

0.20 in. (5 mm) in diameter

0.71 in. (18 mm) in width

1.81 in. (46 mm) in length

Cross chain:

451

4-6. Driving tips

NOTICE

■Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves

and transmitters may not function

correctly when tire chains are fit-

ted.

4

452

4-6. Driving tips

Driving for Your Toyota 4 Runner SUV Sixth Generation (2025-2026)

Related Topics

Popular Owner Manuals

Latest Owner Manuals